NEC Server 5800 320Lb User Manual
N8800-048E/049E  
NEC Express5800/320Lb/320Lb-R  
User's Guide  
1st Edition  
10-2004  
856-124161-901-A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keep this User's Guide handy for quick reference when necessary.  
SAFETY INDICATIONS  
To use NEC Express5800 Series safely, follow the instructions in this User's Guide.  
This guide explains components that pose a danger, types of dangers, and actions taken to prevent  
them; such components are labeled warning.  
This guide and warning labels use “WARNING” and “CAUTION” to indicate a danger depending on  
the degree. These terms are defined as follows:  
Indicates a danger that could lead to a death or serious injury.  
WARNING  
Indicates a danger that could lead to a burn, other injuries or damage to  
physical assets.  
CAUTION  
This guide uses the following three types of symbols to give indications and precautions against a  
danger. They are defined as follows:  
Indicates that there are risks of a danger. Each image symbolizes a particular type of  
danger. (Attention)  
Indicates what you must not do. Each image symbolizes a particular type of  
prohibition. (Prohibited actions)  
Indicates what you must do. Each image symbolizes a particular type of action  
necessary to avoid a danger. (Mandatory actions)  
(Example)  
Symbol to draw attention  
Term indicating a degree of danger  
CAUTION  
High temperature.  
Immediately after the power-off, system components such as hard disk are  
very hot. Wait the server to cool down completely before adding/removing  
some component.  
Symbol indicating a prohibited  
action (may not always be  
indicated)  
Description of a danger  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYMBOLS USED IN THIS USER'S GUIDE AND WARNING LABELS  
Attention  
Indicates a risk of an electric shock.  
Indicates a risk of an injury due to heat.  
Indicates a risk of catching your fingers.  
Indicates a risk of a fire or smoke.  
Indicates a general precaution or warning that is not defined herein.  
Indicates a risk of losing eyesight due to laser beam.  
Indicates a risk of an injury or damage to physical assets due to a hazardous material.  
Prohibited actions  
Indicates a general prohibition that is not defined herein.  
Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the equipment. Otherwise, there is a risk of an  
electric shock or fire.  
Mandatory actions  
Unplug the server. Otherwise, there is a risk of an electric shock or fire.  
Indicates a general action to take that is not defined herein. Make sure to follow the  
instructions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial  
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not  
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to  
radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful  
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.  
This class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing  
Equipment Regulations.  
Cet appareil numériqeu de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel  
brouilleur du Canada.  
CE Statement  
Warning: This is a Class A product. In residential environment, this product may cause radio  
interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures (EN55022).  
NOTE: This product provides resistance against hardware faults with its redundant hardware  
modules. However, this does not mean complete fault-tolerance is assured. For example,  
there is a risk of system down when:  
– A fatal fault occurs in software.  
– Both modules within a redundant hardware pair break down.  
– A fatal fault occurs in a non-redundant component, such as the clock generator circuitry  
or the interconnect backplane.  
– The entire system is cut off from AC power.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trademarks  
NEC ESMPRO, NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, and NEC Express5800/ft series are trademarks of NEC  
Corporation. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.  
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Xeon is a trademark of Intel  
Corporation in the United States. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are  
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. AT is a registered trademark of International Business  
Machines Corporation in the United States and other countries. Stratus is a registered trademark of  
Stratus Technologies Bermuda Ltd. Datalight is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc. Linux is a  
registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Red Hat and RPM are trademarks or registered trademarks  
of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and other countries.  
All other product, brand, or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective trademark owners.  
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition operating system and Microsoft Windows Server  
2003 Enterprise Edition operating system are called Windows Server for short. Microsoft Windows  
2000 Server operating system, Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server operating system and  
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional operating system are called Windows 2000 for short.  
Microsoft Windows NT Server network operating system version 3.51/4.0 and Microsoft Windows  
NT Workstation operating system version 3.51/4.0 are called Windows NT for short. Microsoft  
Windows Millennium Edition Operating System is called Windows Me for short. Microsoft  
Windows 98 operating system is called Windows 98 for short. Microsoft Windows 95 operating  
system is called Windows 95 for short.  
Names used with sample applications are all fictitious. They are unrelated to any existing product  
names, names of organizations, or individual names.  
DLT and DLTtape are trademarks of Quantum Corporation in the United States. QLogic and its logo  
are trademarks of QLogic Corporation in the United States. Fast!UTIL is a trademark of QLogic  
Corporation in the United States. ROM-DOS is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.  
Most of the software used for this server can be redistributed freely under the terms of the BSD  
Copyright and the GNU Public License. However, some software requires permissions for  
redistribution as the owners have ownership. For details, see “Introduction” in the attachment.  
To prevent voltage sag:  
This product may be affected by voltage sag caused due to lightning. To prevent voltage sag, you  
are recommended to use an AC uninterruptible power supply (UPS) unit.  
Notes:  
(1) No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without prior written permission of  
NEC Corporation.  
(2) The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.  
(3) The contents of this manual shall not be copied or altered without prior written permission of  
NEC Corporation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(4) All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of all information in this manual. If you find  
any part unclear, incorrect, or omitted in this manual, contact the sales agent where you  
purchased this product.  
(5) NEC assumes no liability arising from the use of this product, nor any liability for incidental or  
consequential damage arising from the use of this manual regardless of (4) above.  
PREFACE  
Welcome to the NEC Express5800/ft series.  
NEC Express5800/ft series is a “fault-tolerant (ft)” server focusing on “high reliability” in terms of  
fault-tolerance, in addition to “high performance,” “scalability,” and “general versatility” provided  
by NEC Express5800 series. In the event of trouble, its dual configuration will allow the system to  
instantaneously isolate the failed parts to assure non-stop running; operation will be moved  
smoothly from one module to the other, minimizing damage to it. You can use this ft series in a  
mission-critical system where high availability is required. By the use of Linux operating system, it  
also provides outstanding openness for general-purpose applications, etc.  
To make the best use of these features, read this User's Guide thoroughly to understand how to  
operate NEC Express5800/ft series.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ii  
ABOUT THIS USER'S GUIDE  
This User's Guide helps a user to properly setup and use the product.  
Consult this guide to ensure safety as well as to cope with trouble during a system setup and daily  
operation.  
Keep this manual handy.  
This User's Guide is intended for users who have a good knowledge on the basic use of Linux  
operating systems and general I/O devices such as a keyboard and mouse.  
How to Use This User's Guide  
This guide consists of eight chapters and appendices. To help you find a solution quickly, the guide  
contains the following information:  
For descriptions on setting up this product, see the separate volume “User’s Guide (Setup)”.  
Read “Precautions for Use” first.  
Before going on to main chapters, be sure to read “Precautions for Use.” These precautions are very  
important for using the product safely.  
Chapter 1 Precautions for Use  
This chapter describes precautions necessary to use the product safely and properly. Be  
sure to read this chapter before using the product. It also provides information on user  
support. It will be helpful when you need maintenance service, support, etc.  
Chapter 2 General Description  
This chapter describes what you should know about the product: its component names,  
functions, operating procedures as well as handling of devices and other parts.  
Chapter 3 Linux Setup and Operation  
This chapter describes setup and operation specific to the product when it is on Linux.  
Chapter 4 System Configuration  
This chapter describes how to make settings of built-in basic input/output system. It also  
describes factory-shipped parameters.  
Chapter 5 Installing and Using Utilities  
This chapter describes features and operating procedures of a standard utility “NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER.” It also describes procedures to install and operate various  
software programs contained in its CD-ROM.  
Chapter 6 Maintenance  
This chapter describes maintenance procedures and use of maintenance tools. If you  
need to move the product for maintenance purposes, follow the steps provided in this  
chapter.  
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting  
If the product does not work properly, see this chapter before deciding that it is a  
breakdown.  
Chapter 8 System Upgrade  
This chapter describes procedures to add options and precautions. See also this chapter  
when you replace failed components.  
Appendix A Specifications  
This appendix lists specifications of the product.  
Appendix B I/O Port Addresses  
This appendix lists factory-assigned I/O port addresses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iii  
Additional symbols  
The following symbols are used throughout this User's Guide in addition to the caution symbols  
describe at the beginning.  
Important points or instructions to keep in mind when using the  
server or software  
IMPORTANT:  
Something you need to make sure when using the server of  
software  
CHECK:  
TIPS:  
Helpful information, something useful to know  
Accessories  
This product is shipped with various accessories. See the attached list to make sure everything is  
included and check the individual items. If some component is missing or damaged, contact your  
sales agent.  
ꢀ Keep the accessories in a safe place. You will need them when you perform setup,  
addition of options, or replacement of failed components.  
ꢀ To check NEC EXPRESSBUILDER components, see the attached list.  
ꢀ Be sure to fill out and mail the software registration card that is attached to your operating  
system.  
ꢀ Make backup copies of included floppy disks, if any. Keep the original disks as the master  
disks; use these copies in operation.  
ꢀ Improper use of an included floppy disk or CD-ROM may alter your system environment.  
If you find something unclear, stop using them and contact your sales agent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iv  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
CONTENTS  
PREFACE......................................................................................................................................vii  
ABOUT THIS USER'S GUIDE ......................................................................................................ii  
Chapter 1 Precautions for Use ..................................................................................... 1-1  
WARNING LABELS ...................................................................................................................1-2  
Tower Model ............................................................................................................................1-2  
Rack-mount Model...................................................................................................................1-4  
PCI/CPU Modules....................................................................................................................1-6  
PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY..................................................................................................1-8  
General.....................................................................................................................................1-8  
Use of Power Supply and Power Cord...................................................................................1-10  
Installation, Relocation, Storage and Connection...................................................................1-11  
Cleaning and Handling of Internal Devices ...........................................................................1-13  
During Operation ...................................................................................................................1-14  
Rack-mount Model.................................................................................................................1-15  
For Proper Operation..............................................................................................................1-16  
TRANSFER TO THIRD PARTY ...............................................................................................1-18  
DISPOSAL OF EQUIPMENT AND CONSUMABLES ...........................................................1-19  
IF SYSTEM TROUBLE IS SUSPECTED.................................................................................1-20  
ABOUT REPAIR PARTS...........................................................................................................1-20  
ABOUT OUR WEB SERVICE..................................................................................................1-20  
Chapter 2 General Description..................................................................................... 2-1  
STANDARD FEATURES............................................................................................................2-2  
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF COMPONENTS......................................................................2-6  
Front View................................................................................................................................2-6  
Front View (inside)...................................................................................................................2-8  
CD- ROM Drive.......................................................................................................................2-9  
Rear View...............................................................................................................................2-10  
CPU Module...........................................................................................................................2-12  
PCI Module............................................................................................................................2-14  
Chassis Board Layout.............................................................................................................2-15  
LEDs ......................................................................................................................................2-16  
BASIC OPERATION .................................................................................................................2-28  
Locking and Unlocking the Front Bezel ................................................................................2-28  
Power ON...............................................................................................................................2-30  
Power OFF .............................................................................................................................2-31  
POST Check...........................................................................................................................2-32  
Floppy Disk Drive..................................................................................................................2-35  
CD-ROM Drive......................................................................................................................2-37  
Chapter 3 Linux Setup and Operation ......................................................................... 3-1  
HARD DISK CONFIGURATIONS THAT CAN BE BUILT ON THE NEC Express5800/ft  
series.............................................................................................................................................3-2  
REPLACING 3.5-INCH HARD DISK DRIVE ...........................................................................3-4  
How to Locate Failed Disks.....................................................................................................3-4  
Restoring Redundant Configuration Manually.........................................................................3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vi  
Chapter 4 System Configuration..................................................................................4-1  
SYSTEM BIOS ~ SETUP ~ ........................................................................................................ 4-2  
Starting SETUP Utility............................................................................................................ 4-3  
Description of On-Screen Items and Key Usage..................................................................... 4-4  
Configuration Examples.......................................................................................................... 4-5  
Menu and Parameter Descriptions........................................................................................... 4-8  
SCSI BIOS ∼ Fast!UTIL ∼ ........................................................................................................ 4-29  
Start ....................................................................................................................................... 4-29  
Configuration Settings........................................................................................................... 4-32  
Scan SCSI Bus....................................................................................................................... 4-36  
SCSI Disk Utility................................................................................................................... 4-36  
Select Host Adapter ............................................................................................................... 4-36  
Exit Fast!UTIL ∼ Termination and Storage of Fast!UTIL ∼................................................. 4-37  
Setting List for Optional SCSI Device .................................................................................. 4-37  
FORCED SHUTDOWN AND CLEAR..................................................................................... 4-38  
Forced Shutdown................................................................................................................... 4-38  
Clear CMOS / Password (Configuring Motherboard Jumpers)............................................. 4-39  
Chapter 5 Installing and Using Utilities .......................................................................5-1  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER .......................................................................................................... 5-2  
Start Menu ............................................................................................................................... 5-2  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu .................................................................................... 5-4  
Consoleless Menu.................................................................................................................... 5-7  
Master Control Menu .............................................................................................................. 5-9  
NEC ESMPRO Agent and Manager .......................................................................................... 5-10  
Overview ............................................................................................................................... 5-10  
NEC ESMPRO Agent............................................................................................................ 5-18  
NEC ESMPRO Manager....................................................................................................... 5-23  
Maintenance of NEC Express5800/ft series.......................................................................... 5-36  
NEC MWA ∼ MANAGEMENT WORKSTATION APPLICATION ∼ ..................................... 5-56  
Servers to be remotely managed by MWA............................................................................ 5-56  
Remote Management Configuration for the Server without Console.................................... 5-57  
Chapter 6 Maintenance..................................................................................................6-1  
DAILY MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................... 6-2  
Checking Alert......................................................................................................................... 6-2  
Checking STATUS LEDs and LCD Display ........................................................................... 6-2  
Making Backup Copies ........................................................................................................... 6-3  
Cleaning................................................................................................................................... 6-3  
SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS .......................................................................................................... 6-7  
Test Items................................................................................................................................. 6-7  
Startup and Exit of System Diagnosis ..................................................................................... 6-7  
OFF-LINE MAINTENANCE UTILITY..................................................................................... 6-9  
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility................................................................................ 6-9  
Features of Off-line Maintenance Utility................................................................................. 6-9  
RELOCATING/STORING THE NEC Express5800/ft series.....................................................6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vii  
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting........................................................................................... 7-1  
TO LOCATE THE ERRORS........................................................................................................7-2  
ERROR MESSAGES...................................................................................................................7-3  
Error Messages by LED Indication..........................................................................................7-3  
Error Messages on the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).............................................................7-3  
POST Error Messages ............................................................................................................7-14  
Error Notification by BEEP ...................................................................................................7-20  
Linux Error Messages ............................................................................................................7-21  
Server Management Application Error Message....................................................................7-23  
SOLVING PROBLEMS.............................................................................................................7-24  
Problems with NEC Express5800/ft series.............................................................................7-24  
Event Log...............................................................................................................................7-31  
Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ............................................................................7-32  
Problems with Master Control Menu .....................................................................................7-34  
Problems with NEC ESMPRO...............................................................................................7-35  
COLLECTION OF TROUBLE LOGS ......................................................................................7-36  
Collection of syslog................................................................................................................7-36  
Collection of System Information ..........................................................................................7-36  
Collection of the Memory Dump ...........................................................................................7-37  
Backup of IPM Information ...................................................................................................7-38  
Chapter 8 System Upgrade........................................................................................... 8-1  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS...........................................................................................................8-2  
ANTI-STATIC MEASURES........................................................................................................8-3  
PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE .......................................................................8-4  
3.5-INCH HARD DISK DRIVE ..................................................................................................8-5  
Installing 3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive.........................................................................................8-7  
Removing 3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive........................................................................................8-9  
Replacing 3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive......................................................................................8-10  
RAID CONFIGURATION WHEN DISKS ARE ADDED ........................................................8-11  
CPU MODULE ..........................................................................................................................8-13  
Removing CPU Module.........................................................................................................8-14  
Installing CPU Module...........................................................................................................8-16  
DIMM.........................................................................................................................................8-18  
Installing DIMM ....................................................................................................................8-20  
Removing DIMM...................................................................................................................8-21  
Replacing DIMM ...................................................................................................................8-22  
PROCESSOR (CPU)..................................................................................................................8-23  
Installation..............................................................................................................................8-24  
Removing CPU ......................................................................................................................8-27  
Replacing CPU.......................................................................................................................8-28  
PCI MODULE............................................................................................................................8-29  
Precautions.............................................................................................................................8-30  
Removing PCI Module...........................................................................................................8-31  
Installing PCI Module............................................................................................................8-33  
PCI BOARD...............................................................................................................................8-35  
Installing PCI Board...............................................................................................................8-36  
Removing PCI Board .............................................................................................................8-41  
Replacing PCI Board..............................................................................................................8-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
viii  
Setup of Optional PCI Board................................................................................................. 8-43  
Appendix A Specifications........................................................................................... A-1  
Appendix B I/O Port Address....................................................................................... B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Precautions for Use  
This chapter includes information necessary for proper and safe operation of the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-2  
WARNING LABELS  
Warning labels are placed in certain parts of the system so that the user stays alert to possible risks  
(Do not remove or damage these labels).  
If some label is missing, about to peel off, or illegible, contact your sales agent.  
The figures below show locations of the labels on tower model and rack-mount model servers.  
Tower Model  
Label B  
Label C  
Label A  
Label E  
Label D  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-3  
Label A  
Label B  
Label C  
Label D  
Label E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-4  
Rack-mount Model  
Label A  
Label B  
Label C  
Label D  
Label E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-5  
Label A  
Label B  
Label C  
Label D  
Label E  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-6  
PCI/CPU Modules  
PCI Module  
Label A  
External View  
Label B  
Internal View  
CPU Module  
Label A  
External View  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-7  
Label B  
Internal View  
Label A  
Label B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-8  
PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY  
This section provides precautions for using the server safely. Read this section carefully to ensure  
proper and safe use of the server. For symbol meanings, see "SAFETY INDICATIONS" described  
in the previous section.  
General  
WARNING  
Do not use the equipment in an operation where human lives are involved or  
high reliability is required.  
This equipment is not intended for use in controlling or use with facilities or  
systems where human lives are involved or high reliability is required, including  
medical devices or nuclear, aerospace, transportation, and traffic control  
facilities. NEC assumes no liability for any accidents or damage to physical  
assets resulting from the use of this equipment in such systems or facilities.  
Do not continue to use the equipment if you detect smoke, odor, or noise.  
If the equipment emits smoke, odor, or noise, immediately flip off the POWER  
switch, unplug the cord, and contact your sales agent. There is a risk of a fire.  
Do not insert a wire or metal object  
Do not insert a wire or metal objects into a vent or disk drive slot. There is a risk  
of an electric shock.  
Do not use the equipment in an unsuitable place.  
Do not install a server rack in an unsuitable environment.  
Other systems also may be affected, and the rack may fall over to cause a fire  
or injuries. For details about installation environment and quake-resistant  
engineering, see the attached manual or contact your sales agent.  
Do not install the equipment on a nonconforming rack.  
Install the equipment on a 19-inch rack confirming to the EIA standard. Do not  
use the equipment without a rack or install it on a nonconforming rack. The  
equipment may not function properly, and there is a risk of damage to physical  
assets or injuries. For suitable racks, contact your sales agent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-9  
CAUTION  
Prevent water or foreign objects from getting into the equipment.  
Do not let water or foreign objects (e.g., pins or paper clips) enter the  
equipment. There is a risk of a fire, electric shock, and breakdown. When such  
things accidentally enter the equipment, immediately turn off the power and  
unplug the cord. Contact your sales agent instead of trying to disassemble it  
yourself.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-10  
Use of Power Supply and Power Cord  
WARNING  
Do not handle a power plug with a wet hand.  
Do not plug/unplug a power cord with a wet hand. There is a risk of an electric  
shock.  
Do not connect the ground wire to a gas pipe.  
Never connect the ground wire to a gas pipe. There is a risk of a gas explosion.  
CAUTION  
Do not plug the cord in a nonconforming outlet.  
Use a wall outlet with specified voltage and power type. Otherwise, there is a  
risk of a fire or current leakage.  
Avoid installing the equipment where you may need an extension cord. If the  
cord that does not meet the power specifications, there is a risk of overheating  
that could lead to a fire.  
Do not plug too many cords in a single outlet.  
If the rated current is exceeded, there is a risk of overheating that could lead to  
a fire.  
Do not plug the cord insecurely.  
Insert the plug firmly into an outlet. Otherwise, there is a risk of heat or fire due  
to poor contact. If dust settles on the slots and it absorbs moisture, there is also  
a risk of heat or fire.  
Do not use nonconforming power cords.  
Use the power cords specified by NEC. If the rated current is exceeded, there is  
a risk of a fire.  
You also have to observe the following prohibitions to prevent damage to the  
cords.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Do not pull on the cord.  
Do not pinch the cord.  
Do not bend the cord.  
Keep chemicals away from the cord.  
Do not twist the cord.  
Do not place any object on the cord.  
Do not bundle several cords.  
Do not alter, modify, or repair the cord.  
Do not staple the cord.  
Do not use any damaged cord. (Replace it with a new one of the same  
specifications. For replacement procedures, contact your sales agent.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-11  
Installation, Relocation, Storage and Connection  
WARNING  
Disconnect the power cord(s) before installing or removing the equipment.  
Be sure to power off the equipment and unplug its power cords from the wall  
outlet before installation/relocation. All voltage is removed only when the power  
cords are unplugged.  
CAUTION  
Do not hold the front bezel to lift the equipment.  
The equipment weighs around 70 kg (depending on its hardware configuration).  
Do not hold the front bezel, or it may become detached, causing an injury. For  
lifting and moving the equipment, remove the mounted modules from the main  
unit and carry them separately. It takes at least two people to carry it; hold the  
equipment firmly by its bottom.  
Do not install the equipment in an unsuitable place.  
Install the equipment in such a place as specified in this User's Guide. Avoid  
the following, or there is a risk of a fire.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
a dusty place  
a humid place located near a boiler, etc  
a place exposed to direct sunlight  
an unstable place  
Be careful not to hurt your fingers.  
Exercise great care not to hurt your fingers on the rail when you  
mount/dismount the equipment into/from the rack.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-12  
CAUTION  
Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to  
a power source.  
Make sure to power off the server and unplug the power cord from a power  
outlet before installing/removing any optional internal device or  
connecting/disconnecting any interface cable to/from the server. If the server is  
off-powered but its power cord is plugged to a power source, touching an  
internal device, cable, or connector may cause an electric shock or a fire  
resulted from a short circuit.  
Do not use any non-designated interface cable.  
Use only interface cables designated by NEC; identify which component or  
connector to attach beforehand. If you use a wrong cable or make a wrong  
connection, there is a risk of short-circuit that could lead to a fire.  
You also have to observe the following prohibitions about handling and  
connecting interface cables:  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Do not use any damaged cable connector.  
Do not step on the cable.  
Do not place any object on the cable.  
Do not use the equipment with loose cable connections.  
Do not use or store this product in corrosive environment.  
Avoid the usage or storage of this product in an environment which may be  
exposed to corrosive gases, such as those including but not limited to :  
sulfur dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, nitrogen dioxide, chlorine, ammonia and/or  
ozone.  
Avoid installing this product in a dusty environment or one that may be exposed  
to corrosive materials such as sodium chloride and/or sulfur.  
Avoid installing this product in an environment which may have excessive metal  
flakes or conductive particles in the air.  
Such environments may cause corrosion or short circuits within this product,  
resulting in not only damage to this product, but may even lead to be a fire  
hazard.  
If there are any concerns regarding the environment at the planned site of  
installation or storage, please contact your sales agent．  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-13  
Cleaning and Handling of Internal Devices  
WARNING  
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.  
Unless described herein, never attempt to disassemble, repair, or alter the  
equipment. There is a risk of an electric shock or fire as well as malfunction.  
Do not look into the CD-ROM drive  
The CD-ROM drive uses a laser beam. Do not look or insert a mirror inside  
while the system is on. A laser beam is invisible; if your eyes get exposed to it,  
there is a risk of losing eyesight.  
Do not detach a lithium battery yourself.  
This equipment has a lithium battery. Do not detach it yourself. If the battery is  
exposed to fire or water, it could explode.  
When the lithium battery is running down and the equipment doesn’t work  
correctly, contact your sales agent instead of disassembling, replacing or  
recharging it yourself.  
Disconnect the power plug before cleaning the server.  
Make sure to power off the server and disconnect the power plug from a power  
outlet before cleaning or installing/removing internal optional devices. Touching  
any internal device of the server with its power cord connected to a power  
source may cause an electric shock even of the server is off-powered.  
Disconnect the power plug from the outlet occasionally and clean the plug with  
a dry cloth. Heat will be generated if condensation is formed on a dusty plug,  
which may cause a fire.  
CAUTION  
High temperature  
Immediately after powering off the system, system components such as hard  
disk may be very hot. Wait for the server to cool down completely before  
adding/removing components.  
Make sure to complete installation.  
Firmly install all power cords, interface cables and/or boards. An incompletely  
installed component may cause a contact failure, resulting in fire and/or smoke.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-14  
During Operation  
CAUTION  
Do not pull out a device during operation.  
Do not pull out or remove a device while it works. There is a risk of malfunction  
and injuries.  
Do not touch the equipment when it thunders.  
Unplug the equipment when it threatens to thunder. If it starts to thunder before  
you unplug the equipment, do not touch the equipment and cables. There is a  
risk of a fire or electric shock.  
Keep animals away.  
Animal’s waste or hair may get inside the equipment to cause a fire or electric  
shock.  
Do not place any object on top of the server.  
The server may fall down to cause damage to physical assets.  
Do not leave the CD tray ejected.  
Dust may get in the equipment to cause malfunction. The ejected tray may also  
become a cause of injuries.  
Do not use a cellular phone or pager around the equipment.  
Turn off your cellular phone or pager when you use the equipment. Their radio  
waves may cause the equipment to malfunction.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-15  
Rack-mount Model  
CAUTION  
Do not attempt to install the server yourself.  
To avoid a risk of injuries, users should not attempt to install the equipment into  
a rack. Installation should be performed by trained maintenance personnel.  
< For Maintenance Personnel Only >  
Do not remove and carry the equipment with modules mounted.  
When you remove this product from the rack and carry it, remove all modules  
that are mounted first.  
Do not install the equipment in such a manner that its weight is imposed on a  
single place.  
To distribute the weight, attach stabilizers or install two or more racks. It may  
fall down to cause injuries.  
Do not assemble parts alone.  
It takes at least two people to mount doors and trays to a rack. You may drop  
some parts to cause a breakage or injuries.  
Do not pull a device out of the rack if it is unstable.  
Before pulling out a device, make sure that the rack is fixed (by stabilizers or  
quake-resistant engineering).  
Do not leave two or more devices pulled out from the rack.  
If you pull out two or more devices the rack may fall down. You can only pull out  
one device at a time.  
Do not install excessive wiring.  
To prevent burns, fires, and damage to the equipment, make sure that the rated  
load of the power branch circuit is not exceeded. For more information on  
installation and wiring of power-related facilities, contact your electrician or local  
power company.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-16  
For Proper Operation  
Observe the following instructions for successful operation of the server. Failure to observe them  
could lead to malfunction or breakdown.  
ꢀ
Perform installation in a place where the system can operate correctly. For details, see the  
separate volume “User’s Guide (Setup)”.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Before turning off the power or ejecting a disk, make sure that the access LED is off.  
When you have just turned off the power, wait at least 30 seconds before turning it on again.  
Once you have turned on the server, do not turn it off until the "NEC" logo appears on the  
screen.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Before you move the equipment, turn off the power and unplug the cord.  
This server shall not assure reproduction of copy-protect CDs using reproduction equipment  
if such disks do not comply with CD standards.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Clean the equipment regularly. (For procedures, see Chapter 6.) Regular cleaning is effective  
in preventing various types of trouble.  
Lightning may cause voltage sag. As a preventive measure, it is recommended to use UPS  
(uninterruptible power supply).  
This equipment does not support the connection through an UPS serial port (RS-232C) or the  
control using PowerChutePlus.  
ꢀ
Check and adjust the system clock before operation in the following conditions:  
-
-
-
After transporting the equipment  
After storing the equipment  
After the equipment halt under the conditions which is out of the guranteed  
environment conditions (Temperature: 10 to 35°C, Humidity: 20 to 80%).  
Check the system clock once in a month. It is recommended to operate the system clock using  
a time server (NTP server) if it is installed on the system which requires high level of time  
accuracy. If the system clock goes out of alignment remarkably as time goes by, though the  
system clock adjustment is performed, contact your sales agent.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
When you store the equipment, keep it under storage environment conditions (Temperature:  
-10 to 55°C, Humidity: 20 to 80%, non-condensing).  
If NEC Express5800/ft series, the built-in optional devices, and the media set for the backup  
devices (tape cartridges) are moved from a cold place to a warm place in a short time,  
condensation will occur and cause malfunctions and breakdown when these are used in such  
state. In order to protect important stored data and assets, make sure to wait for a sufficient  
period of time to use the server or components in the operating environment.  
Reference: Length of the time effective at avoiding condensation in winter (more than 10°C  
differences between room temperature and atmospheric temperature)  
Disk devices: Approximately 2-3 hours  
Tape media: Approximately 1 day  
ꢀ
Make sure that the optional devices are attachable and connectable to the equipment. There  
is a risk of malfunctions that could lead to a breakdown of the equipment even if you could  
attach and connect.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-17  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Make sure that your options are compatible with the system. If you attach any incompatible  
option, there is a risk of malfunction that could lead to a breakdown.  
It is recommended to use NEC's genuine option products. Some competitors’ products are  
compatible with this server. However, servicing for trouble or damage resulting from such a  
product will be charged even within the warranty period.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-18  
TRANSFER TO THIRD PARTY  
When you transfer (or sell) the product or its included items, you must observe the following:  
Server  
Attach this User's Guide to the server you are transferring (or selling) to a third party.  
IMPORTANT: Data remaining on hard disk:  
When you transfer your server, you are responsible for erasing important data stored on its  
hard disk (e.g., customer information, accounting information); you must be careful to prevent  
such data from leaking out to outsiders.  
Even if you execute a “format” command to erase data superficially, the data actually remains  
on the hard disk. If data is not erased completely, it could be restored by certain software and  
be used for unexpected purposes.  
You are strongly recommended to buy a special type of software or service to avoid such  
trouble. For details, contact your sales agent.  
NEC shall not be accountable for such data leakage caused by your failure to take necessary  
measures.  
Included Software  
When you transfer or sell the included software to a third party, you must meet the following  
conditions:  
ꢀ Transfer all of the software included with the system. Do not retain any copies.  
ꢀ Meet the conditions of transfer described in each software license agreement.  
ꢀ Uninstall untransferable programs, if any, from the server before the transfer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-19  
DISPOSAL OF EQUIPMENT AND CONSUMABLES  
ꢀ When you dispose of the main unit, hard disk drive, floppy disks, CD-ROMs, optional  
boards, etc., you need to observe your local disposal rules. For details, ask your municipal  
office.  
IMPORTANT: For disposal (or replacement) of batteries on the motherboard,  
consult with your sales agent.  
If data remains on the hard disk, backup data cartridges, floppy disks, or other  
writable media (such as CD-R and CD-RW), it could be restored and reused by  
outsiders. The customer is responsible for wiping out such data before disposal. You  
need to exercise sufficient care to protect privacy and confidential information.  
ꢀ Some of the system components have limited lifetime (e.g., cooling fans, built-in batteries,  
built-in CD-ROM drive, floppy disk drive, mouse). For stable operation, it is  
recommended to replace them regularly. For lifetime of individual components and  
replacing procedures, ask your sales agent.  
WARNING  
Do not detach a lithium battery yourself.  
This equipment has a lithium battery. Do not detach it yourself. If the battery is  
exposed to fire or water, it could explode.  
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED WITH INCORRECT TYPE.  
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.  
When the lithium battery is running down and the equipment doesn’t work  
correctly, contact your sales agent instead of disassembling, replacing or  
recharging it yourself.  
PCI module board  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-20  
IF SYSTEM TROUBLE IS SUSPECTED  
Before sending the equipment for repair, try the following:  
1. Check if its power cord and connection cables are attached correctly.  
2. See “Error Messages” in Chapter 7 to check if there is a relevant symptom. If yes, take  
measures as instructed.  
3. Certain software programs are required for operation of NEC Express5800/ft series.  
Check if these programs are properly installed.  
4. Use a commercially available anti-virus program to check the server.  
If the problem isn’t solved by the above actions, stop using the server and consult with your sales  
agent. In this case, check LED indications of the server and alarm indications on the display, which  
will serve as helpful information at the time of repair.  
ABOUT REPAIR PARTS  
The minimum duration of holding repair parts of this equipment may be different for each country,  
so contact the NEC sales representatives.  
If the period is not specified, the repair parts are kept for 5 years after discontinuance of the product.  
ABOUT OUR WEB SERVICE  
Information on NEC Express5800/ft series including modification modules is also available on our  
web site, NEC Express5800 Web Site Asia Pacific, at  
http://www.nec.co.jp/epxress/index.html  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-21  
Advice for Your Health  
Prolonged use of a computer may affect your health. Keep in mind the  
following to reduce stresses on your body:  
Sit in a good posture  
Sit on your chair with your back straight. If the desk height is appropriate,  
you will slightly look down at the screen and your forearms will be parallel to  
the floor. This “good” work posture can minimize muscle tension caused by  
sedentary work.  
If you sit in a “bad” posture—for example, sit round-shouldered or with you  
face too close to the display—you may easily suffer fatigue or have your  
eyesight affected.  
Adjust the installation angle of Display  
Most types of displays allow you to adjust the angle vertically and  
horizontally. This adjustment is very important to prevent the reflection of  
light as well as to make the screen more comfortable to see. Without this  
adjustment, it is difficult to maintain a “good” work posture and may get tired  
soon. Be sure to adjust the angle before using the display.  
Adjust Brightness and Contrast  
Displays allow you to adjust brightness and contrast. Optimum brightness  
and contrast vary depending on the individual, age, brightness of the room,  
etc; you need to make an adjustment accordingly. If the screen is too bright  
or too dark, it is bad for your eyes.  
Adjust the installation angle of Keyboard  
Some types of keyboards allow you to adjust the angle. If you adjust the  
angle to make the keyboard more comfortable to use, you can greatly  
reduce stresses on your shoulders, arms, and fingers.  
Clean the Equipment  
Cleanliness of the equipment is very important not only for reasons of  
appearance but also from the viewpoints of function and safety. Especially,  
you need to regularly clean the display, which gets unclear due to the  
accumulation of dirt.  
Take a break when you get tired  
If you feel tired, you are recommended to refresh yourself by taking a short  
break or doing a light exercise.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-22  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
General Description  
This chapter describes what you need to know to use the NEC Express5800/ft series. Refer to this  
chapter when you want to know about certain components and how to operate them.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-2  
STANDARD FEATURES  
High performance  
ꢀ Intel® Xeon ™ Processor (2.4 GHz)  
ꢀ High-speed Ethernet interface  
(1000Mbps/100Mbps/10Mbps supported)  
ꢀ High-speed disk access (Ultra160 SCSI  
Wide)  
Expandability  
ꢀ Wide variety of optional I/O slots  
Four 64-bit/33 MHz, two 32-bit/33 MHz  
PCI slots  
ꢀ Large memory of up to 3 GB  
ꢀ USB interface  
High-reliability  
Various Features  
ꢀ Memory monitoring feature (1-bit error  
correction/ 2-bit error detection)  
ꢀ Bus parity error detection  
ꢀ Temperature monitoring  
ꢀ Error notification  
ꢀ Built-in fan monitoring feature  
ꢀ Internal voltage monitoring feature  
ꢀ BIOS password feature  
ꢀ Security feature (security lock for front  
bezel)  
ꢀ Graphic accelerator "CT69000"  
supported  
ꢀ El Torito Bootable CD-ROM (no  
emulation mode) format supported  
ꢀ POWER switch mask  
ꢀ AC-LINK feature  
ꢀ Consoleless feature  
Self-diagnosis  
ꢀ Power On Self-Test (POST)  
ꢀ Test and Diagnosis (T&D) Utility  
Management Utilities  
Maintainability  
ꢀ NEC ESMPRO  
ꢀ Off-line Maintenance Utility  
ꢀ NEC Management Workstation  
Application (NEC MWA)  
Ready-to-use  
Easy and Fine Setup  
ꢀ Preinstalled Kernel 2.4-based Linux OS  
ꢀ NEC EXPRESSBUILDER (system setup  
ꢀ Quick cableless connection: hard disk,  
utility)  
CPU module, and PCI module (hot-swap ꢀ SETUP (BIOS setup utility)  
supported)  
ꢀ
Fast!UTIL (SCSI device utility)  
Fault-tolerant Feature  
ꢀ Redundant modules achieved within a  
system  
ꢀ Higher hardware availability by isolation  
of failed module  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-3  
The NEC Express5800/ft series achieves fault-tolerant high-availability in a space-saving form  
factor by incorporating redundant hardware module pairs in a single chassis. These modules work in  
synchronous tight lockstep while constantly making comparisons with each other and detecting  
anomalous diversions in operation.  
Mirrored  
Memory  
Compare/Sync  
Memory  
CPU Module #1  
CPU Module #2  
PCI Module #1  
PCI Module #2  
Mirror  
Linux software programs  
New fault-tolerant technology  
Standard product  
Even if one hardware module stops, the server can continue operation with the other module. After the failed  
module is replaced, the new module will obtain information from the other and resume operation.  
NEC Express5800/ft series is a highly fault-tolerant server that achieves continuous computing  
operations, data storage mirror, and continuous network connection. It allows you to run  
Linux-based applications.  
NEC Express5800/ft series achieves continuous computing operations for the Linux operating  
system and server-based applications with its redundant CPU processing and redundant memory. It  
assures data redundancy through duplication of server data on an independent storage system. These  
features eliminate server downtime that is usually caused by network disconnection or trouble with  
the I/O controller, Ethernet adapter or disk drive, and support operation of the network and server  
applications continuously. While being transparent to application software, NEC Express5800/ft  
series achieves high fault-tolerance.  
NEC Express5800/ft series detects status changes, errors and other events and notifies the user of  
these events. If you use an alarm notification tool, you can configure NEC Express5800/ft series to  
notify you when certain events occur.  
NEC ESMPRO is installed on the system as a server management solution. NEC ESMPRO, a  
GUI-based management tool, allows you to monitor, view, and configure NEC Express5800/ft  
series. This tool also supports both local and remote management of NEC Express5800/ft series.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-4  
NEC Express5800/ft series mainly provides the following advantages:  
ꢀ Highly fault-tolerant processing and I/O subsystems  
NEC Express5800/ft series use redundant hardware and software to assure server  
operation even if one module suffers trouble with its processor, memory, I/O (including  
trouble related to the I/O controller), disk drive, or Ethernet adapter.  
ꢀ Continuous network connection  
NEC Express5800/ft series maintains continuous network connection by detecting any  
trouble with the network adapter, connection, etc. If trouble occurs, the standby network  
connection will take over all network traffic processing and thus securely maintain the  
network system connection of NEC Express5800/ft series without losing network traffic  
or client connection.  
ꢀ Support of multiple network connections  
Since NEC Express5800/ft series can support multiple Ethernet connections, you can add  
network redundant control or network traffic control.  
ꢀ Industry standard hardware platform  
NEC Express5800/ft series uses IA (Intel Architecture)-based system hardware.  
ꢀ No need to modify applications  
You can run Linux-compliant applications on NEC Express5800/ft series. Thus, unlike  
other highly fault-tolerant products, special API or scripts are not necessary.  
ꢀ Automatic mirroring  
NEC Express5800/ft series automatically maintains data as the current data.  
ꢀ Automatic detection and notification of faults  
NEC Express5800/ft series detects and sorts out all events such as general status changes  
and faults, and notifies Syslog of these events.  
ꢀ Transparent migration  
NEC Express5800/ft series constantly monitors events. If trouble occurs on NEC  
Express5800/ft series’ server module, it will transparently use a redundant module of the  
failed module. This feature maintains data and user access without losing application  
service.  
ꢀ Automatic reconfiguration  
When the failed module restarts after the trouble is corrected, NEC Express5800/ft series  
will perform reconfiguration automatically, and if necessary, resynchronize the affected  
modules. Reconfiguration can include CPU processing (e.g., CPU memory), server's  
operating system (and related applications), and system data stored on the hard disks. In  
most cases, NEC Express5800/ft series automatically restores redundancy of the server  
modules after recovery.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-5  
ꢀ Local and remote management  
NEC Express5800/ft series uses NEC ESMPRO as a server management tool. This tool  
uses a GUI that enables monitoring and setting of NEC Express5800/ft series. NEC  
ESMPRO can be used both locally and remotely on work station PCs or server PCs.  
ꢀ syslog function  
When troubles etc., are detected on NEC Express5800/ft series, they will be recorded in  
syslog.  
ꢀ In-service repairing  
You can repair or replace a failed module even if NEC Express5800/ft series is operating.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-6  
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF COMPONENTS  
Names and functions of components are shown below:  
Front View  
Tower model  
Rack-mount model  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-7  
1
2
Front bezel  
A door that covers internal components. You can lock it with the included security key.  
Key slot  
Insert the security key in this slot to unlock the front bezel.  
Stabilizers  
3
Parts for stabilizing a tower-model unit.  
Casters  
4
Wheels for moving a tower-model unit.  
BMC status LED  
5
See “LEDs” in this chapter for details.  
PCI module status LED 1  
6
See “LEDs” in this chapter for details.  
PCI module status LED 2  
7
See “LEDs” in this chapter for details.  
DISK ACCESS LED  
8
See “LEDs” in this chapter for details.  
CPU module status LED 1  
9
See “LEDs” in this chapter for details.  
CPU module status LED 2  
10  
See “LEDs” in this chapter for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-8  
Front View (inside)  
Tower model  
Rack-mount model  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-9  
1
2
3
4
5
PCI module (for group 1)  
A module that includes a PCI board and LAN controller.  
PCI module (for group 2)  
A module that includes a PCI board and LAN controller.  
CPU module (for group 1)  
A module that includes a CPU (processor) and memory (DIMM).  
CPU module (for group 2)  
A module that includes a CPU (processor) and memory (DIMM).  
POWER switch  
A switch for turning on/off power to the system. The POWER switch on the primary PCI  
module will be lit. Press it once to turn on power. Press it again to turn off power. Depress  
the switch for more than four seconds to force the system to power down. The POWER  
switch on the secondary PCI module will be unlit and will not respond until a failure in the  
primary PCI module causes the secondary PCI module to assume primary functionality.  
CD-ROM drive  
Used for reading data from CD-ROMs.  
Although there are two CD-ROM drives, only the one on the active primary PCI module can  
be used (the module with the lit POWER Switch LED).  
6
7
3.5-inch disk bay  
Slots for adding hard disks. On a tower model, they are called Slots 1, 2, and 3 from the  
bottom. On a rack-mount model, they are called Slots 1, 2, and 3 from the left. Slots of the  
same number are mirrored between the groups 1 and 2.  
8
9
DUMP switch  
A switch for outputting a memory image from the kernel to a file.  
DISK LED (green/amber)  
An LED on the hard disk. Blinks in green while the hard disk is accessed and turns amber  
when operating in simplex mode. If one of the mirrored hard disks fails, the failed disk’s LED  
turns green and the other disk’s LED turns amber.  
CD- ROM Drive  
1
2
3
Status LED  
An LED that stays on while the loaded CD-ROM is accessed.  
CD tray eject button  
A button for ejecting the CD tray.  
Manual release hole  
When the eject button does not work, insert a metal pin into this hole to forcefully eject the CD  
tray.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-10  
Rear View  
CPU module (for Group1)  
PCI module (for Group2)  
PCI module (for Group1)  
CPU module (for Group2)  
Tower model  
PCI module (for Group1)  
PCI module (for Group2)  
CPU module (for Group1)  
CPU module (for Group2)  
Rack-mount model  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-11  
1
2
Serial port A connector  
Connected to a device that has a serial interface. For maintenance use only.  
AC inlet B (for Group1)  
PC socket for plugging a power cord (for Group1). If you desire to make the PCI module for  
Group1 primary, use this inlet to connect the power cord first.  
Serial port B connector  
Connected to a device that has a serial interface. For maintenance use only.  
USB connectors  
3
4
Tower model: from top: USB1, USB2  
Rack-mount model: from left: USB1, USB2  
Connected to devices that support the USB interface.  
Connect the keyboard (with mouse) to USB 1; connect the USB floppy disk drive to USB 2.  
AC inlet A (for Group2)  
5
PC socket for plugging a power cord (for Group2). If you desire to make the PCI module for  
Group2 primary, use this inlet to connect the power cord first.  
Monitor connector  
Connected to the display unit.  
SCSI connector  
6
7
Used for connecting external SCSI devices.  
PCI module status LED 1  
8
See “LEDs” in this chapter for details.  
PCI module status LED 2  
9
See “LEDs” in this chapter for details.  
PCI board slot status LED (Slot1)  
See “LEDs” in this chapter for details.  
PCI board slot status LED (Slot2)  
See “LEDs” in this chapter for details.  
PCI board slot status LED (Slot3)  
See “LEDs” in this chapter for details.  
LINK/ACT LED  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
See “LEDs” in this chapter for details.  
LAN connector 1  
A connector for 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 10BASE-T. Connected to the network  
system on LAN.  
15  
16  
17  
18  
1000/100/10 LED  
See “LEDs” in this chapter for details.  
LINK/ACT LED  
See “LEDs” in this chapter for details.  
100/10 LED  
See “LEDs” in this chapter for details.  
LAN connector 2  
A connector for 100BASE-TX and 10BASE-T. Connected to the network system on LAN.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-12  
CPU Module  
Group 1 and group 2 have the same configuration.  
1
2
Module handle  
Cooling fan  
3
4
5
6
7
8
CPU module board  
CPU socket #2 (additional)  
AC inlet (in the back)  
Backpanel connector (in the back)  
CPU socket #1 (standard)  
DIMM  
9
Power unit  
10  
Power backboard  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-13  
CPU module board  
Group 1 and group 2 have the same configuration.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Cooling fan connector  
LED connector  
Power connector  
CPU socket #2  
CPU socket #1  
DIMM sockets (Slots #1 to #6 from left. Add memory modules in pairs: #1 and #2, #3 and #4,  
#5 and #6.)  
*This section only describes connectors that are used for replacing parts or upgrading. Other  
connectors have been setup before shipment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-14  
PCI Module  
Group 1 and group 2 have the same configuration.  
1
2
3
Cooling fan  
Power unit  
AC inlet (in the back)  
The AC cable in the module which is connected to the AC inlet cannot be used for other  
purposes.  
4
5
6
7
8
9
Backpanel connector (in the back)  
PCI module board  
Video board  
PCI riser card  
PCI board retention bracket  
SCSI backboard  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-15  
PCI module board  
Group 1 and group 2 have the same configuration.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SCSI connector (external)  
Configuration jumper pin  
Battery (lithium battery)  
Cooling fan connector  
Power connector  
IDE connector  
Power switch connector  
LED connector  
SCSI connector (internal)  
Chassis Board Layout  
Rack-mount model  
Back panel  
Interface board  
Backplane  
Clock board  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-16  
LEDs  
This section describes indications and meanings of the LEDs on NEC Express5800/ft series.  
Refer to pages 2-6 through 2-11 for the locations of each LED.  
POWER LED  
The POWER switch of the PCI module also functions as a POWER LED. When power is supplied  
to the modules, POWER LED on the primary side will illuminate (the switch also works on the  
primary side alone).  
BMC Status LED  
The BMC Status LED indicates the status of the Baseboard Management Controller (BMC)  
installed on NEC Express5800/ft series.  
The LED stays green while the server is running normally. If the LED is not green, there is  
something wrong with the server.  
The table below shows indications of the BMC Status LED and their meanings.  
TIPS:  
ꢀ If the server has the NEC ESMPRO or Off-line Maintenance Utility installed, you can  
view the error log to identify the cause of a trouble.  
ꢀ When you want to restart the server, perform a shutdown if the OS allows you to shut  
down the system. If not, perform a reset or forced shutdown, or you can restart the  
server by unplug and plugging the power cord.  
LED indications  
Description  
Action  
Primary  
Secondary  
Green  
Off  
BMC operates normally  
and CPU and PCI modules  
are in duplex mode.  
–
Green  
Off  
Off  
CPU or PCI modules are  
not in duplex mode during  
operation.  
Remount components whose Status  
LED is red. If the problem persists,  
replace that module.  
(blinking  
every 1  
second)  
Off  
AC power is all off.  
Performing POST.  
Turn on the AC power.  
Wait for a while; it will illuminate in  
green shortly after POST.  
CPU module error  
occurred.  
PCI module error occurred.  
After turning off the power, turn it on to  
restart the system. If some error  
message appears on the POST screen,  
write it down and contact your sales  
agent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-17  
LED indications  
Description  
Action  
Primary  
Secondary  
Off  
Amber  
Detected a fatal  
temperature error.  
If LCD displays some error message,  
refer to the error message list (see  
Chapter 7).  
Check if dust is accumulated on internal  
fans and confirm that the fan cables are  
connected firmly. If the message does  
not disappear, contact your sales agent.  
Detected a fatal voltage  
error.  
Contact your sales agent.  
Amber  
Off  
Detected a temperature  
error to be warned.  
If LCD displays some error message,  
refer to the error message list (see  
Chapter 7).  
Check if dust is accumulated on internal  
fans and confirm that the fan cables are  
connected firmly. If the message does  
not disappear, contact your sales agent.  
(blinking  
every 1  
second)  
Detected a voltage error to  
be warned.  
Contact your sales agent.  
Detected a device defect.  
Detected a fan alarm.  
If LCD displays some error message,  
refer to the error message list (see  
Chapter 7).  
Check if dust is accumulated on internal  
fans, and confirm that the fan cables are  
connected firmly. If the message does  
not disappear, contact your sales agent.  
Red  
Off  
BMC is being dumped.  
Wait for a while; it will go off soon.  
PCI module may be  
connected incorrectly.  
Check if PCI module is connected  
correctly. Look for loose screws.  
BMC may be out of order.  
BMC firmware may need  
reprogramming. Contact your sales  
agent.  
Wait for a while. After a while, the BMC  
status LED on the secondary will blink.  
ANY*1  
Red  
BMC is being dumped.  
PCI module may be  
connected incorrectly.  
Check if PCI module is connected  
correctly. Look for loose screws.  
BMC may be out of order.  
BMC firmware may need to be  
rewritten. Contact your sales agent.  
ANY*1  
ANY*1  
Red  
Transfers data being  
synchronized after a PCI  
module is replaced (this is  
not an error).  
Do not remove either of the PCI  
modules or control the AC/DC power  
until the LED stops blinking.  
(blinking  
every 0.5  
second)  
Red  
The revision of BMC  
Contact your sales agent.  
(blinking  
every 1  
second)  
firmware does not match.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-18  
LED indications  
Description  
Action  
Primary  
Secondary  
Red  
Red  
BMC is being dumped.  
Wait for a while. After a while, the BMC  
status LED on the primary will go off.  
Both BMCs are out of  
order.  
Check if both PCI modules are  
connected correctly. Confirm that  
screws are fixed firmly. If the indication  
does not change, contact your sales  
agent.  
*1 The status of green, green (blinking every second), amber, amber (blinking every second), or off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-19  
PCI Module Status LEDs 1/2  
Disk Access LED  
The PCI module has three LEDs.  
Combined, the three LEDs show the status of the PCI modules and hard disks.  
See “NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF COMPONENTS” (page 2-6) for the locations of LEDs.  
(1) Status LED 1 of both PCI modules are off  
PCI#1  
Status DISK Status  
LED 2 Access LED 2 Access  
LED LED  
Green Green/ Green Green/ Both PCI modules  
PCI#2  
DISK  
Description  
Action  
Off  
*
Off  
*
operate normally in  
duplex mode.  
-
Green  
Off  
Amber Amber Some trouble occurred  
on a hard disk of the  
Reconfigure RAID of the hard  
disks (See Chapter 3, Linux  
Setup and Operation).  
Remount the hard disk.  
If the problem persists, contact  
your sales agent.  
PCI module 1.  
Amber Amber Green  
Off  
Some trouble occurred  
on a hard disk of the  
PCI module 2.  
Off  
Off  
Amber Amber AC power is not  
supplied to the PCI  
module 1.  
Check if the power cord is  
connected correctly.  
Check the condition of breaker  
and UPS.  
Check if the power unit of the  
PCI module 1 is connected  
correctly.  
The PCI module 2  
operates in simplex  
mode.  
Remount the PCI module 1.  
If the problem persists, contact  
your sales agent.  
Amber Amber  
Off  
Off  
AC power is not  
supplied to the PCI  
module 2.  
The PCI module 1  
operates in simplex  
mode.  
Check if the power cord is  
connected correctly.  
Check the condition of breaker  
and UPS.  
Check if the power unit of the  
PCI module 2 is connected  
correctly.  
Remount the PCI module 2.  
If the problem persists, contact  
your sales agent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-20  
PCI#1  
Status DISK Status  
LED 2 Access LED 2 Access  
LED LED  
Green Green/ Amber Green/ i) There is an error in  
PCI#2  
DISK  
Description  
Action  
Make sure that the option PCI  
board is properly mounted and  
cables are properly connected  
to the connecters of the PCI  
module or the option PCI  
board.  
Remount the PCI module 1.  
If the problem persists, contact  
your sales agent.  
Off  
*
Off  
*
the option PCI board or  
the PCI module board  
connected or mounted  
on PCI module 1.  
ii) There is an error in  
the devices connected  
to the option PCI board  
connected or mounted  
on PCI module 1.  
(including the cable  
disconnection)  
iii) The LAN cable  
connected or mounted  
on PCI module 1 is  
disconnected.  
Amber Green/ Green Green/ i) There is an error in  
Make sure that the option PCI  
board is properly mounted and  
cables are properly connected  
to the connecters of the PCI  
module or the option PCI  
board.  
Remount the PCI module 2.  
If the problem persists, contact  
your sales agent.  
Off  
*
Off  
*
the option PCI board or  
the PCI module board  
connected or mounted  
on PCI module 2.  
ii) There is an error in  
the devices connected  
to the option PCI board  
connected or mounted  
on PCI module 2  
(including the cable  
disconnection)  
iii) The LAN cable  
connected or mounted  
on PCI module 2 is  
disconnected.  
Amber Amber Green Green/ DISK is performing  
Wait for the mirroring to be  
completed.  
Off*  
Green Green/ Amber Amber  
Off*  
mirroring.  
* DISK ACCESS LED illuminates green when hard disk is accessed.  
Tips: When the Status LED 1 is off, the colors of the Status LED 2 indicate the followings.  
You must be careful especially when detaching modules.  
- Green: Unmounting the module has no effect on the system operation.  
- Amber: Unmounting the module causes a system down.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-21  
(2) Status LED 1 of both PCI modules are red  
PCI#1 PCI#2  
Status DISK Status  
DISK  
Access  
LED  
Description  
Action  
LED 2 Access LED 2  
LED  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On standby (AC power  
is supplied through the  
cord, but the system  
has not been powered  
on yet.)  
After turning on the power,  
wait for the OS to start. When  
the OS starts and duplex  
mode is established, the  
indications will return to  
normal. If they do not get  
back to normal, remount the  
PCI module.  
If the problem persists,  
contact your sales agent.  
Wait for the OS to start. When  
the OS starts and duplex  
mode is established, the  
indications will return to  
normal.  
Wait for the OS to start. When  
the OS starts and duplex  
mode is established, the  
indications will return to  
normal.  
Green  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
The PCI module 1 is  
performing diagnosis  
(Diag).  
Green  
The PCI module 2 is  
performing diagnosis  
(Diag).  
(3) Status LED 1 of only PCI module 1 is red  
PCI#1 PCI#2  
Status DISK Status  
DISK  
Access  
LED  
Description  
Action  
LED 2 Access LED 2  
LED  
Off  
Off  
Amber  
Amber The PCI module 1 is on Start the PCI module 1 from ft  
standby (The PCI server utility (See Chapter 5).  
module 1 has not been Remount the PCI module 1.  
powered on yet.)  
The PCI module 2  
operates in simplex  
mode.  
If the problem persists,  
contact your sales agent.  
Green  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Amber  
Off  
Amber The PCI module 1 is  
performing diagnosis  
(Diag).  
Wait for the PCI module 1 to  
start. When the PCI module 1  
starts and duplex mode is  
established, the indications  
will return to normal.  
The PCI module 2  
operates in simplex  
mode.  
Off  
Only the PCI module 1  
is on standby (AC  
power is supplied  
through the cord, but  
the system has not  
been powered on yet.)  
AC power is not  
Check if the power cord is  
connected correctly.  
Check the condition of  
breaker and UPS.  
Check if the power unit is  
connected correctly.  
Remount the PCI module 2.  
If the problem persists,  
contact your sales agent.  
supplied to the PCI  
module 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-22  
PCI#1  
PCI#2  
Status DISK Status  
LED 2 Access LED 2  
LED  
DISK  
Access  
LED  
Description  
Action  
Green  
Off  
Off  
Off  
The PCI module 1 is  
performing diagnosis  
(Diag).  
AC power is not  
supplied to the PCI  
module 2.  
Wait for the OS to start. After  
the OS starts, check the  
Status LEDs and then take  
the appropriate actions.  
If the problem persists,  
contact your sales agent.  
(4) Status LED 1 of only PCI module 2 is red  
PCI#1 PCI#2  
Status DISK Status  
DISK  
Access  
LED  
Description  
Action  
LED 2 Access LED 2  
LED  
Amber Amber  
Off  
Off  
The PCI module 2 is on Start the PCI module 2 from ft  
standby (The PCI server utility (See Chapter 5).  
module 2 has not been Remount the PCI module 2.  
powered on yet.)  
The PCI module 1  
operates in simplex  
mode.  
If the problem persists,  
contact your sales agent.  
Amber Amber Green  
Off  
Off  
The PCI module 2 is  
performing diagnosis  
(Diag).  
The PCI module 1  
operates in simplex  
mode.  
Only the PCI module 2  
is on standby (AC  
power is supplied  
through the cord, but  
the system has not  
been powered on yet.)  
AC power is not  
supplied to the PCI  
module 1.  
Wait for the PCI module 2 to  
start. When the PCI module 2  
starts and duplex mode is  
established, the indications  
will return to normal.  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Check if the power cord is  
connected correctly.  
Check the condition of  
breaker and UPS.  
Check if the power unit is  
connected correctly.  
Remount the PCI module 1.  
If the problem persists,  
contact your sales agent.  
Wait for the OS to start. After  
the OS starts, check the  
Status LEDs and then take  
the appropriate actions.  
If the problem persists,  
contact your sales agent.  
Off  
Off  
Green  
Off  
The PCI module 2 is  
performing diagnosis  
(Diag).  
AC power is not  
supplied to the PCI  
module 1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-23  
CPU Module Status LEDs 1/2  
The CPU module has two LEDs.  
Combined, the two LEDs show the status of CPU modules:  
See “NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF COMPONENTS” (page 2-6) for the locations of LEDs.  
CPU#1  
CPU#2  
Description  
CPU module  
Action  
Status Status Status Status  
LED1  
Off  
LED2 LED1  
LED2  
Green The  
Green  
Off  
operates normally in  
duplex mode.  
-
Off  
Amber  
Red  
Off  
The CPU module 2 is  
on standby (The CPU  
module 2 has not been  
powered on yet.)  
The CPU module 1  
operates in simplex  
mode.  
Start the CPU module 2 from ft  
server utility (See Chapter 5).  
Remount the CPU module 2.  
If the problem persists, contact  
your sales agent.  
Red  
Off  
Off  
Amber The CPU module 1 is  
on standby (The CPU  
module 1 has not been  
powered on yet.)  
The CPU module 2  
operates in simplex  
mode.  
Start the CPU module 1 from ft  
server utility (See Chapter 5).  
Remount the CPU module 1.  
If the problem persists, contact  
your sales agent.  
Off  
Red  
Off  
Amber  
Green  
Off  
Red  
Off  
Green The CPU module 2 is  
performing diagnosis  
(Diag).  
Wait for the CPU module 2 to  
start. When the CPU module 2  
starts and duplex mode is  
established, the indications will  
return to normal.  
The CPU module 1  
operates in simplex  
mode.  
Amber The CPU module 1 is  
performing diagnosis  
(Diag).  
Wait for the CPU module 1 to  
start. When the CPU module 1  
starts and duplex mode is  
established, the indications will  
return to normal.  
The CPU module 2  
operates in simplex  
mode.  
Off  
Amber AC power is not  
supplied to the CPU  
module 1. The CPU  
module 2 operates in  
simplex mode.  
Check if the power cord is  
connected correctly.  
Check the condition of breaker  
and UPS.  
Check if the power unit is  
connected correctly.  
Remount the CPU module 1.  
If the problem persists, contact  
your sales agent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-24  
CPU#1  
CPU#2  
Description  
Action  
Status Status Status Status  
LED1  
Off  
LED2 LED1  
LED2  
Off  
Amber  
Off  
AC power is not  
supplied to the CPU  
module 2.  
Check if the power cord is  
connected correctly.  
Check the condition of breaker  
and UPS.  
Check if the power unit is  
connected correctly.  
The CPU module 1  
operates in simplex  
mode.  
Remount the CPU module 2.  
If the problem persists, contact  
your sales agent.  
Wait for the OS to start. After the  
OS starts, check the Status LEDs  
and then take the appropriate  
actions.  
Off  
Red  
Red  
Off  
Green  
Off  
Red  
Off  
Green AC power is not  
supplied to the CPU  
module 1.  
The CPU module 2 is  
performing diagnosis  
(Diag).  
AC power is not  
supplied to the CPU  
module 2.  
If the problem persists, contact  
your sales agent.  
Off  
The CPU module 1 is  
performing diagnosis  
(Diag).  
On standby (AC power  
is supplied through the  
cord, but the system  
has not been powered  
on yet.)  
Red  
Off  
Off  
After turning on the power, wait for  
the OS to start.  
When the OS starts and duplex  
mode is established, the  
indications will return to normal. If  
not, check the Status LEDs and  
then take the appropriate actions.  
If the problem persists, contact  
your sales agent.  
Red  
Red  
Green  
Off  
Red  
Red  
The CPU module 1 is  
performing diagnosis  
(Diag).  
Green The CPU module 2 is  
performing diagnosis  
(Diag).  
Red  
Red  
Amber  
Amber  
Off  
Off  
Amber The CPU module 1  
memory is being  
dumped. (This occurs  
only when  
maintenance is being  
performed.)  
Off  
-
-
Off  
Off  
Amber  
Off  
Red  
Red  
Amber The CPU module 2  
memory is being  
dumped. (This occurs  
only when  
maintenance is being  
performed.)  
Amber  
Tips: When the Status LED 1 is off, the colors of the Status LED 2 indicate the followings.  
You must be careful especially when detaching modules.  
- Green: Unmounting the module has no effect on the system operation.  
- Amber: Unmounting the module cause a system down.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-25  
PCI Board Slot Status LEDs (P1, P2, P3)  
To show the status of PCI board slots, each PCI module has three status LEDs.  
LED  
indications  
Description  
Action  
Off  
PCI board is mounted The system operates normally.  
correctly and operates  
in duplex mode.  
The PCI board is not  
mounted; is mounted  
incorrectly; or power  
is not supplied.  
If the PCI board is not mounted or is mounted  
incorrectly, just mount it correctly; there is no problem.  
Check the condition of power unit.  
If the problem persists, contact your sales agent.  
Amber  
Red  
The PCI board is  
mounted correctly and  
operates in simplex  
mode.  
Although the PCI  
board is mounted, it  
may be offline or not  
be working.  
Simplex mode is not a problem.  
To use ft series features, attach a PCI board to a slot  
of the same on the other PCI module.  
Remount the PCI board correctly.  
Remount the PCI module correctly.  
If the problem persists, contact your sales agent.  
For LED indications when option boards are attached, see “PCI Module” in Chapter 8.  
DISK LED  
A DISK LED shows the status of the hard disk mounted in a 3.5-inch device bay.  
Combined, the two DISK LEDs on PCI modules 1 and 2 show the status of the hard disks.  
PCI  
PCI  
Description  
Action  
module 1 module 2  
Green/  
Off*  
Green/  
Off*  
Hard disks are now in RAID  
configuration and running normally.  
–
Green/  
Off*  
Amber  
Hard disks are configured to  
establish RAID.  
Wait until RAID configuration is  
established.  
A trouble occurred on the hard disk Check RAID status of hard  
of the PCI module 1. disks.  
The hard disk on the PCI module 2 If the problem persists, contact  
is operating in non-RAID status.  
your sales agent.  
Amber  
Green/  
Off*  
Hard disks are configured to  
establish RAID.  
Wait until RAID configuration is  
established.  
A trouble occurred on the hard disk Check RAID status of hard  
of the PCI module 2. disks.  
The hard disk on the PCI module 1 If the problem persists, contact  
is operating in non- RAID status. your sales agent.  
*A DISK LED goes off (blinks) when a hard disk is accessed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-26  
TIPS:  
ꢀ
When there are many accesses, the access LED will blink frequently. Check if the  
LED blinks in green when the number of accesses decreases, or if it is green when there  
are no accesses anymore.  
ꢀ
When you power on NEC Express5800/ft series and the access LEDs do not  
illuminate green, remount the hard disks.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-27  
LAN Connector LEDs  
Two LAN ports (connectors) located in the back have two LEDs each.  
•
100/10 LED (LAN connector 2), 1000/100/10 LED (LAN connector 1)  
These LEDs show the transfer rate of the network that is being connected.  
LAN connector 1  
1000/100/10  
LAN connector 2  
LED indications  
100/10  
Amber  
Off  
Operating as 1000BASE-T.  
Operating as 100BASE-TX.  
Operating as 100BASE-TX or  
10BASE-T.  
Operating as 10BASE-T.  
•
LINK/ACT LED  
The LINK/ACT LED shows the status of a standard network port. It is green if power is  
supplied to the main unit and hub, and they are connected correctly (“LINK”). It blinks green  
while the network port sends or receives data (ACT).  
When the LED does not illuminate during “LINK,” check the condition and connection of  
network cables. If there is nothing wrong with the cables, a defect is suspected in the network  
(LAN) controller. In this case, contact your sales agent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-28  
BASIC OPERATION  
This section describes basic operation procedures of NEC Express5800/ft series.  
Locking and Unlocking the Front Bezel  
The front bezel covers built-in components of the server such as the POWER switch, CD-ROM  
drive, and hard disks.  
The tower model server has a door-type bezel (it can also be detached). The rack-mount model  
server has a cover-like detachable bezel.  
You need to open the front bezel when you access the POWER switch, CD-ROM drive or hard disk.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀWithout using the security key, you cannot open or detach the front bezel.  
ꢀIt is not recommended to use the server with its bezel detached.  
Tower Model  
Insert the security key into the slot and turn it to release the lock. Hold the handle on the left side of  
the bezel and pull it. After closing the front bezel, lock it with the key for security.  
Release  
Lock  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-29  
Rack-mount Model  
The rack-mount model server is equipped with a detachable front bezel.  
Detach  
Follow the steps below to detach the front bezel:  
5. Insert the security key into the slot and turn it with a little pressure to release the lock.  
Release  
Lock  
6. Hold the right side of the front bezel lightly and pull it open.  
7. Detach the bezel from the main unit by sliding it to the left a little to disengage the tabs  
from the frame.  
Tabs  
Frame  
Attach  
To attach the front bezel, engage the tabs on the frame on the left side of the main unit. After  
attaching and closing the front bezel, lock it with the key for security.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-30  
Power ON  
To power on NEC Express5800/ft series, press the POWER switch located on the front panel.  
Follow the steps below to turn on the power. (A rack-mount model is shown here for convenience of  
explanation. However, the steps are the same for a tower model except that the modules are  
mounted vertically.)  
1. Power on the display unit and other peripheral devices connected to the server.  
TIPS:  
ꢀIf the power cord is connected to a power controller like a UPS, make sure that it  
is powered on.  
ꢀWhen NEC Express5800/ft series is powered on, BMCs between the two PCI  
modules are synchronized. (The BMC Status LED on secondary module blinks.)  
See Chapter 2 “LEDs” for details of the BMC Status LED.  
2. Detach the front bezel (or open it in the case of a tower model).  
3. Confirm that the BMC Status LED on both PCI modules are off and press the POWER  
switch which illuminates green and located on the front panel.  
After a while, the "NEC" logo will appear on the screen.  
POWER switches* (LEDs)  
*You can only use a power  
switch whose LED is on.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Do not turn off the power before the "NEC" logo appears.  
When powering on, make sure that the BMC Status LED on the both PCI  
modules are off and then press the power switch.  
While the "NEC" logo is displayed on the screen, NEC Express5800/ft series is  
performing a power-on self test (POST) to check itself. For details, see "POST Check"  
described later in this chapter. Upon the completion of POST, the OS will start.  
TIPS: If the server finds errors during POST, it will interrupt POST and display the  
error message. See Chapter 7.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-31  
Power OFF  
Follow the steps below to turn off the power. If NEC Express5800/ft series is plugged to a UPS, see  
manuals included with the UPS or the application that controls the UPS.  
4. Perform a proper shutdown process from Linux for NEC Express5800/ft series.  
Press the POWER switch to turn off the power.  
5. Power off all peripheral devices.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-32  
POST Check  
POST (power-on self test) is a self-test function stored on the motherboard of NEC Express5800/ft  
series.  
When you power on the server, POST will start automatically to check the motherboard, ECC  
memory modules, CPU modules, keyboard, mouse, etc. It also shows startup messages for various  
BIOS setup utilities.  
According to the factory default settings, the “NEC” logo appears on the display while POST is  
being performed. (To view POST’s details, press Esc.)  
TIPS:  
ꢀYou can view POST details from the beginning without the need to press Esc when the  
BIOS menu is displayed: select [System Configuration] - [Advanced], and set [Boot-time  
Diagnostic Screen] to "Enabled" (see Chapter 4).  
ꢀYou can view the test items and details from a management PC where NEC ESMPRO  
Manager or NEC MWA is installed.  
You don't always need to check POST details. You will need to check messages when:  
ꢀ You install a new NEC Express5800/ft series.  
ꢀ A failure is suspected.  
ꢀ You hear several beeps between the time of the power-on and OS start-up.  
ꢀ The display unit or the LCD* shows an error message.  
*For details, see “Error Messages on LCD” in Chapter 7.  
TIPS: Although there is no LCD on the front of NEC Express5800/ft series, you  
can check error messages using NEC MWA or NEC ESMPRO Manager. For details,  
see Chapter 7.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-33  
Flow of POST  
This section walks you through how POST is performed.  
6. When you power on the system, one selected CPU/PCI module will start up.  
POST will be performed on this selected CPU/PCI module.  
7. Memory check starts.  
A message appears at the upper left of the screen to show that the basic and expanded  
memories are being counted. The memory check may take a few minutes to complete  
depending on the server’s memory size. Likewise, it may take about one minute for the  
screen to appear when the server is rebooted.  
Note that if you have replaced the PCI module, the server will perform a reset of the MAC  
address, then reboot itself before the memory check.  
8. The server starts processor check, IO check, and initialization.  
Several messages appear: they show the ID of the selected CPU/PCI modules, information  
on the processor, detection of the keyboard and mouse, etc.  
9. A message appears at the lower left of the screen, prompting for startup of the BIOS setup  
utility “SETUP.”  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP  
You will need to start it when you want modify the configuration for using the server.  
Unless this message appears together with an error message, you don't need to start the  
utility to modify the configuration. (If you wait for a few seconds, POST will go on  
automatically.)  
To start the SETUP utility, press F2 while the above message is displayed. For setting and  
parameter functions, see the section of BIOS setup.  
When SETUP is completed, the server will reboot itself automatically and perform POST.  
10. A message appears prompting for startup of SCSI BIOS setup utility.  
When a built-in SCSI controller is detected, a message will appear prompting for startup  
of SCSI BIOS setup utility. (If you wait for a few seconds, POST will go on  
automatically.)  
If you press Ctrl + Q, the SCSI BIOS setup utility will start. For setting and parameter  
functions, see the section on SCSI setup.  
You will need to use this utility, for example, when you have changed the server’s internal  
SCSI device connections. However, you usually don’t need to use it.  
When SETUP is complete, the server will reboot automatically and perform POST again.  
If multiple SCSI controller boards are mounted on the PCI bus, the SCSI BIOS startup  
message will appear for these boards in numerical order (PCI #1, PCI #2, PCI #3…).  
11. The screen shows SCSI ID numbers used by the connected SCSI devices.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-34  
12. Upon completion of POST, the password entry screen appears prior to OS startup.  
The password entry screen will appear after the normal termination of POST only if you  
have set a password in the BIOS setup utility “SETUP.”  
You can enter a password up to three times. If you enter an incorrect password three times,  
the startup will be unsuccessful. In this case, turn off the power and then turn it on again  
after waiting 30 seconds to boot the server.  
IMPORTANT: Do not set a password before installing the OS.  
13. Upon completion of POST, the OS will start up.  
Behavior at Occurrence of Error  
If POST or OS startup does not finish normally, the server will reboot itself automatically.  
At the time of reboot, it will select the other CPU/PCI module and run POST or OS startup.  
In this manner, the server retries POST or OS startup with different combinations of CPU/PCI  
modules. If POST does not finish normally with any combinations, the server will stop with the  
state of DC OFF.  
While performing retries, the server displays or registers the error types.  
For details of error messages, see Chapter 7 “Troubleshooting.”  
POST Error Messages  
When the server detects an error during POST, it will notify you of the occurrence in the following  
manners:  
ꢀ Displays an error message on the display unit.  
ꢀ Displays an error message on the LCD*.  
ꢀ Makes a beeping sound.  
*For details, see “Error Messages on LCD” in Chapter 7.  
These notification methods are described in “POST Error Messages” in Chapter 7.  
IMPORTANT: Before you contact your sales agent, write down the error messages and  
patterns of the beeping sound. They will serve as helpful information at the time of  
maintenance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-35  
Floppy Disk Drive  
A USB floppy disk drive is attached to the main unit. It allows you to read and write (save) data  
using floppy disks.  
The USB floppy disk drive accepts the following types of floppy disks:  
ꢀ 2HD floppy disk (1.44MB)  
ꢀ 2DD floppy disk (720KB)  
Insert/Remove Floppy Disk  
Before inserting a floppy disk into the drive, make sure that NEC Express5800/ft series is on and  
that the drive’s USB cable is connected to the USB connector at the back of the server.  
Insert a floppy disk into the drive firmly with the label side up and its protective shutter facing the  
drive.  
TIPS:  
ꢀ
You cannot physical format floppy disks on the USB floppy disk drive. Use formatted  
floppy disks.  
ꢀIf you power on or restart NEC Express5800/ft series with a floppy disk left in the drive,  
the server will access the floppy disk to start the system. Unless a system exits on the FD,  
the server will be unable to start.  
To remove a floppy disk from the drive, press the eject button.  
TIPS: Before removing a floppy disk, make sure that the access LED is off. If you eject a  
floppy disk while the LED is on, the stored data could be damaged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-36  
Use of Floppy Disk  
You may need to store important data on floppy disks. Since the floppy disk is a very delicate  
medium, you must handle it with extra care:  
ꢀ Push the floppy disk gently into place.  
ꢀ Attach the label on a proper position.  
ꢀ Do not use a pencil or ballpoint pen to write on the disk.  
ꢀ Do not open the protective shutter.  
ꢀ Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place.  
ꢀ Do not place anything on the floppy disk.  
ꢀ Do not leave the floppy disk in a place that is subject to direct sunlight or high  
temperatures (e.g., near a heater).  
ꢀ Keep away from cigarette smoke.  
ꢀ Do not leave the floppy disk near water or chemicals.  
ꢀ Keep away from magnetic objects.  
ꢀ Do not clip disks. Be careful not to drop.  
ꢀ Store floppy disks in a protective case where they are kept away from magnetic waves or  
dust.  
ꢀ To prevent data from being erased accidentally, the floppy disk has a write-protect notch.  
When the disk is write-protected, you can read data, but you cannot write the data or  
format the disk. It is recommendable to write-protect floppy disks that contain important  
data. To write-protect a floppy disk, slide the write-protect notch located on its back.  
ꢀ The floppy disk is a very delicate storage medium. Dust or changes in temperature could  
cause data to be lost. Data loss could also be caused by faulty operation and computer  
trouble. To avoid such possible data loss, it is recommendable to back up important data  
regularly. (Be sure to make back-up copies of the disks that are included with NEC  
Express5800/ft series.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-37  
CD-ROM Drive  
NEC Express5800/ft series has a CD-ROM drive on the front panel. It is a device used to read data  
from a CD-ROM (compact disc read-only memory). Compared to a floppy disk, a CD-ROM allows  
for larger volume and fast data readout.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. There are risks of a  
burn, injury, or damage to physical assets. For details, see PRECAUTIONS  
FOR SAFETY in Chapter 1.  
ꢀ Do not leave the CD tray ejected.  
About the CD-ROM Drive of NEC Express5800/ft series  
Two CD-ROM drives (one on each PCI module) are mounted on NEC Express5800/ft series. Both  
CD-ROM drives are available after the OS startup. When installing from the Back Up CD-ROM,  
only the CD-ROM drive mounted to the primary PCI module can be used for installation.  
When you cannot eject a CD-ROM  
When you cannot eject the CD-ROM by pressing the eject button, follow the steps below to eject it:  
Manual release hole  
14. Perform the shutdown process of the Linux for Express5800/ft series. Then press the  
POWER switch to turn off the power of the NEC Express5800/ft series.  
15. Use a metal pin of about 1.2 mm in diameter and 100 mm long (alternatively, you can use  
a fairly large paper clip after straightening). Insert it gently into the manual release hole  
located to the right of the eject button until the tray is ejected.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Do not use a toothpick, plastic pin, or other breakable objects.  
If you cannot eject the CD-ROM by following the steps above, contact your  
sales agent.  
16. Hold the tray and pull it out.  
17. Take out the CD-ROM.  
18. Push the tray back.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-38  
Use of CD-ROM  
Observe the following when you use a CD-ROM on NEC Express5800/ft series:  
ꢀ As for a disk such as a noncompliant “copy-protected CD,” we shall not guarantee that  
you can use a CD player to play it with this server.  
ꢀ Be careful not to drop the CD-ROM.  
ꢀ Do not bend or place anything on the CD-ROM.  
ꢀ Do not attach labels on the CD-ROM.  
ꢀ Do not touch the signal side (blank side).  
ꢀ Place the CD-ROM gently on the tray with the printed side up.  
ꢀ Do not scratch, or use a pencil or ballpoint pen to write on the CD-ROM.  
ꢀ Keep away from cigarette smoke.  
ꢀ Do not leave the CD-ROM in a place that is subject to direct sunlight or high temperatures  
(e.g., due to a heater).  
ꢀ If the CD-ROM gets dirty with dust or fingerprints, wipe it gently from its center to edge  
with a dry soft cloth.  
ꢀ When you clean the CD-ROM, use a CD cleaner. Do not use a record cleaner (spray),  
benzine, or thinner.  
ꢀ Store the CD-ROM in a protective case when not in use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3  
Linux Setup and Operation  
This chapter describes setup procedures to make NEC Express5800/ft series ready for use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-2  
HARD DISK CONFIGURATIONS THAT CAN BE BUILT  
ON THE NEC Express5800/ft series  
In the NEC Express5800/ft series, all built-in disks need RAID configuration. Configure RAID 1  
using software for the NEC Express5800/ft series.  
The hard disks on the same slot location of the PCI module configure RAID. In the following figure,  
disks in Slot 1, Slot 2 and Slot 3 of Group 1 are paired with disks in Slot 1, Slot 2 and Slot 3 of  
Group 2 respectively to configure RAID.  
Slot 1  
Slot 3  
Slot 2  
Group 1  
Group 2  
Slots used for mirroring process  
The following indicates the device names of built-in SCSI disks for each SCSI disk slot. Use these  
device names for all operations of each built-in SCSI disk.  
Slot No of PCI  
module  
Device name  
Slot 1 for Group 1  
Slot 2 for Group 1  
Slot 3 for Group 1  
Slot 1 for Group 2  
Slot 2 for Group 2  
Slot 3 for Group 2  
sda  
sdb  
sdc  
sdd  
sde  
sdf  
IMPORTANT:  
When adding disks or reconfiguring RAID, the status of each disk becomes “RESYNCING” or  
“RECOVERY”. Do not insert/remove disks, turn off the power, or restart the system during this  
status. Wait until the status of “RESYNCING” or “RECOVERY” is finished. You can check the  
status of RAID using ftdiskadm described later. For details, see the separate volume of User’s  
Guide (Setup).  
The SD device, described previously is used to configure RAID 1.  
IMPORTANT: Two hard disk drives which configure RAID 1 must have the same disk  
capacity. Also, two hard disk drives must have the same logical structure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-3  
Perform operations for built-in SCSI disks, such as mounting a disk, to devices (md) for RAID by  
software.  
With the standard configuration at the time of shipment, the SCSI disks are inserted to the slot 1 of  
the PCI modules for Group 1 and Group 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-4  
REPLACING 3.5-INCH HARD DISK DRIVE  
Follow the procedure below to remove the failed hard disk. If the hard disk fails, it should be  
replaced with new device with the server powered-on.  
How to Locate Failed Disks  
This section describes a procedure to locate failed disks.  
1. Open [Data Viewer] from ESMPRO Manager.  
If trouble occurs, the color changes from green to red.  
In this case, you will notice that there is trouble with both the SCSI Enclosures (ID: 41)  
and (ID: 42).  
2. Check the SCSI Enclosures (ID: 41) and (ID: 42) on the tree.  
See the path information in [General Information] of [SCSI Slot] to locate a group of  
3.5-inch device bays that corresponds to each enclosure.  
The table below shows the path information on Groups 1 and 2:  
Slot  
PCI module  
SCSI adapter  
SCSI bus  
Group1  
Group2  
10  
11  
5
5
0
0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-5  
3. See the path information in [General Information] of [SCSI Slot (ID: 41/1)].  
It shows that PCI module, SCSI adapter, and SCSI bus are 10, 5, and 0, respectively.  
This allows you to find that SCSI Slot (ID: 41/1) belongs to Group 1. SCSI slots under  
SCSI Enclosure (ID: 41) correspond to Group 1. Therefore, Group 2 corresponds to SCSI  
slots under SCSI Enclosure (ID: 42).  
You will find that the failed disk located in the SCSI slot (ID: 41/2) is the second disk of  
Group 1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-6  
Restoring Redundant Configuration Manually  
This section describes procedure to change the built-in disk on which failures occurred and  
re-establish the dual configuration of hard disks.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀYou need to log in the system as a root user to perform this operation.  
ꢀWhile recovery operation of RAID, the status of two disks configuring RAID become  
“RESYNCING” or “RECOVERY” to build RAID for a while. Do not stop or restart the  
system until that status is finished.  
1. Select “RAID” – “Remove Half Disk” or “Remove Full Disks” of ftdiskadm to separate  
the disk specified by the slot number from the RAID, and from the system.  
2. Remove the disk from the system and then insert a new disk.  
3. Use “Repair Disk” of ftdiskadm to perform RAID recovery.  
The following is an example from the separation of the built-in disk inserted to the slot 1  
of the PCI module for Group 2, to the recovery. SCSI SLOT numbers on Remove  
correspond to the slot numbers of the PCI modules as:  
Slot 1 to 3 of the PCI module for Group 1 : SCSI SLOT number 1 to 3  
Slot 1 to 3 of the PCI module for Group 2 : SCSI SLOT number 4 to 6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-7  
<<Confirm that the disk is disconnected>>  
<<Confirm that the above status is SIMPLEX before  
exchanging the disk>>  
<<The following is an example of a RAID recovery  
procedure>>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-8  
<<Confirm that the duplication process is started >>  
<<Perform RESYNC to each md device. After a while,  
use the following command and check the status  
again.>>  
<<If each md device’s status is DUPLEX,  
disk duplication is completed.>>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-9  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
System Configuration  
This chapter describes Basic Input Output System (BIOS) configuration.  
When you install the server for the first time or install/remove optional devices, thoroughly read this  
chapter for better understanding and correct setups.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-2  
SYSTEM BIOS ~ SETUP ~  
The SETUP utility is provided to make basic hardware configuration for the server. This utility is  
pre-installed in the flash memory of the server and ready to run.  
The server is configured with the correct parameters using the SETUP utility and shipped in the best  
conditions. Thus, you don't need to use the SETUP utility in most cases. However, you might wish  
to use the SETUP utility in the cases described below.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀThe SETUP utility is intended for system Administrator use only.  
ꢀThe SETUP utility allows you to set a password. The server is provided with two levels of  
password: Supervisor and User. With the Supervisor password, you can view and change  
all system parameters of the SETUP utility. With the User password, system parameters  
available for viewing and changing are limited.  
ꢀDo not set any password before installing the OS.  
ꢀThe server contains the latest version of the SETUP utility. Dialog boxes appearing on your  
SETUP utility, thus, may differ from descriptions in this User's Guide. If you find  
anything unclear, see the online help or ask your sales agent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3  
Starting SETUP Utility  
Powering on the server starts POST (Power On Self-Test) and displays its check results. If the NEC  
logo is displayed, press Esc.  
After a few seconds, either of the following messages appears at bottom left on the screen  
depending on your system configuration.  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP, Press <F12> to Network  
You may see either of the following messages at bottom left on the screen when POST terminates.  
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to SETUP  
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> SETUP, <F12> Network  
Press F2 to start the SETUP utility and display its Main menu.  
If you have previously set a password with the SETUP utility, the password entry screen appears.  
Enter the password.  
Enter password:[  
]
Up to three password entries will be accepted. If you fail to enter the password correctly for three  
consecutive times, the server halts. (You can no longer proceed.) Power off the server.  
TIPS: The server is provided with two levels of password: Supervisor and User. With the  
Supervisor password, you can view and change all system configurations. With the User  
password, the system configurations you can view or change are limited.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4  
Description of On-Screen Items and Key Usage  
Use the following keyboard keys to work with the SETUP utility. (Key functions are also listed at  
the bottom of the screen.)  
Indicates the current menu  
Setup item  
menu  
Online help  
window  
Indicates there  
are submenus  
Parameter (high-lights upon selection) menu  
Explanation of key  
function menu  
Selects an item on the screen. The highlighted item is currently  
selected.  
Cursor (↑, ↓):  
Selects the Main, Advanced, Security, System Hardware, Boot, or  
Exit menu.  
Cursor (←, →):  
– and +:  
Changes the value (parameter) of the selected item. When a  
submenu option (an option preceded by "X") is selected, these  
keys are disabled.  
Enter  
Esc  
F1:  
Press Enter to choose the selected parameter.  
Displays the previous screen.  
Press F1 when you need help on SETUP operations. The help  
screen for SETUP operations appears. Press Esc to return to the  
previous screen.  
F9:  
Sets the default parameter to the parameter of the currently  
displayed item. (The default parameter may differ from the factory  
setting.  
F10:  
Save configuration values and exit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-5  
Configuration Examples  
The following describes examples of configuration required to use software-link features or for  
system operations.  
Link with Management Software  
To use the management PC with "NEC MWA" installed for remote operations  
ꢀ Remote operation via LAN  
Select [Advanced] → [Advanced] → [RomPilot Support] → [Enabled].  
ꢀ Remote operation via direct connection using cross cable  
Select [System Hardware] → [Console Redirection] → [Console Connection] → [Direct].  
ꢀ Remote operation via WAN  
Select [System Hardware] → [Console Redirection] → [Console Connection] → [Via  
Modem].  
UPS  
To link power supply with the UPS  
ꢀ To power on the server when power is supplied from the UPS  
Select [System Hardware] → [AC-LINK] → [Power On].  
ꢀ
To keep the server off-powered even when power is supplied from the UPS if the POWER  
switch was used to power off  
Select [System Hardware] → [AC-LINK] → [Last State].  
ꢀ To keep the server off-powered even when power is supplied from the UPS  
Select [System Hardware] → [AC-LINK] → [StayOff].  
Keyboard  
To set NumLock and key repeat  
Select [Advanced] → [Keyboard Features] and set each item.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-6  
Security  
To set passwords on the BIOS level  
Select [Security] → [Set Supervisor Password] and enter a password.  
Set Supervisor password first, then User password.  
To enable/disable the POWER switch  
Select [Security] → [Power Switch Mask] → [Unmasked].  
Select [Security] → [Power Switch Mask] → [Masked].  
IMPORTANT: Masking the POWER switch disables forced shutdown (see  
Chapter 4) as well as power on/off using the POWER switch.  
Serial Devices  
To setup serial devices  
Select [Advanced] → [Peripheral Configuration] and setup each device.  
Optional PCI–related devices  
To install optional PCI board, etc.,  
Select [Advanced] → [Option ROM] → [PCI Slot n] → [Enabled]  
n: Slot number to install the board  
Boot  
To change the boot order of devices connected to the server  
Select [Boot] and specify the boot order.  
To display POST check results  
Select [Advanced] → [Advanced] → [Boot-time Diagnostic Screen] → [Enabled].  
You can also press Esc while the NEC log is on the screen to display POST check results.  
To control from the HW console  
ꢀ Remote operation via LAN  
Select [Advanced] → [Advanced] → [RomPilot Support] → [Enabled].  
ꢀ Remote operation via WAN  
Select [System Hardware] → [Console Redirection] and set each item.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-7  
Memory  
To check the installed memory (DIMM) status  
Select [Advanced] → [Memory Information] and check the status indications.  
Saving the Configuration Data  
To save the BIOS configuration data  
Select [Exit] → [Save Changes & Exit] or [Save Changes].  
To discard changes to the BIOS configuration data  
Select [Exit] → [Exit Without Saving Changes] or [Load Previous Value].  
To restore the default BIOS configuration (it may be different from the configuration at  
shipment)  
Select [Exit] → [Get Default Values].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-8  
Menu and Parameter Descriptions  
The SETUP utility has the following six major menus:  
ꢀ Main  
ꢀ Advanced  
ꢀ Security  
ꢀ System Hardware  
ꢀ Boot  
ꢀ Exit  
To configure detailed settings of functions, select a submenu from the above menus. Below  
describes configurable functions and parameters and the factory settings displayed in the screen for  
each menu.  
Main  
Start the SETUP utility to display the Main menu.  
<Example>  
Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility  
Main  
Advanced  
Security  
System Hardware  
Boot  
Exit  
Item Specific Help  
Processor Type:  
Processor Speed:  
Cache RAM:  
Intel(R) Xeon(TM)processor  
2.40 GHz  
512KB  
<Tab>, <Shift-Tab>, or  
<Enter> selects field.  
System Memory:  
584KB  
Extended Memory: 511MB  
BIOS Version:  
System Time:  
System Date:  
Language:  
REL.6.0.8:M-1  
[18:54:08]  
/ 12/ 2002]  
[
11  
[English(US)]  
Primary Master:  
CD-ROM  
F1  
Help  
-/+  
Change Values  
F9 Setup Defaults  
Select Item  
Esc Exit  
Enter Select  
Sub-Menu  
F10 Save Changes & Exit  
Select Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-9  
Available options in the Main and descriptions are listed below.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
Processor Type  
Intel® Xeon™  
Processor  
Indicates the type of the installed  
CPU (view only).  
Processor Speed  
Cache RAM  
2.40GHz  
Indicates the clock speed of the  
installed CPU (view only).  
Indicates the cache RAM size (view  
only).  
512KB  
System Memory  
584KB  
Indicates the total size of the basic  
memory (view only).  
Extended Memory (Extended memory  
size)  
Indicates the total size of the  
extended memory (view only).  
BIOS Version  
(Version of BIOS)  
Indicates the version of the system  
BIOS (view only).  
System Time  
System Date  
Language  
HH:MM:SS  
MM/DD/YYYY  
[English (US)]  
Français  
Specify the current time.  
Specify the current date.  
Select a language in which the  
SETUP is displayed.  
Only English (US) is supported  
currently.  
Deutsch  
Italiano  
Español  
Primary Master  
CD-ROM  
Indicates device type connected to  
IDE (Primary master). (View only)  
[
]: Factory-set  
IMPORTANT: Check and adjust the system clock before operation in the following  
conditions.  
-
-
-
After transporting the equipment  
After storing the equipment  
After the equipment halt under the conditions which is out of the guranteed  
environment conditions (temperature: 10 to 35°C, humidity: 20 to 80%).  
Check the system clock once in a month. It is recommended to operate the system clock using a  
time server (NTP server) if it is installed on the system which requires high level of time  
accuracy. If the system clock becomes delayed or advanced remarkably as time passes even after  
system clock adjustment, contact your sales agent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-10  
Advanced  
Move the cursor onto "Advanced" to display the Advanced menu.  
Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility  
Main  
Advanced  
Security  
System Hardware  
Boot  
Exit  
Item Specific Help  
Advanced  
Select Advanced  
Processor Information  
Memory Information  
Peripheral Configuration  
Monitoring Configuration  
Option ROM  
options.  
Keyboard Features  
-/+ Change Values  
Enter Select Sub-Menu  
F1 Help  
Esc Exit  
F9 Setup Defaults  
Select Item  
F10 Save Changes & Exit  
Select Menu  
There is no configurable items on the above Advanced menu screen. Display each sub menu and  
make settings on the sub menu screen. Select an option with the "►" mark and press Enter to  
display its submenu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-11  
Advanced  
Select "Advanced" on the Advanced menu to display the following screen.  
Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility  
Advanced  
Advanced  
Item Specific Help  
Display the diagnostic  
screen during POST  
instead of the Logo.  
The boot-time diagnostic  
screen is redirection  
or rompilot is enabled.  
Boot-time Diagnostic Screen:  
RomPilot Support:  
POST Error Pause:  
[Disabled]  
[Disabled]  
[Enabled]  
-/+  
Change Values  
F1  
Help  
F9 Setup Defaults  
Select Item  
Esc Exit  
Enter Select  
Sub-Menu  
F10 Save Changes & Exit  
Select Menu  
See the table below for setup options on the screen.  
Option  
Boot-time  
Diagnostic Screen  
Parameter  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Description  
Your Setting  
Specify whether to display the Power On  
Self-Test (POST) screen at start-up. If  
"Disabled" is selected, the NEC logo  
appears while POST is in progress. (To  
display POST check results, press Esc.)  
If "RomPilot Support" is set to "Enabled" or  
"Console Redirection" is set, this option is  
unconditionally set to "Enabled".  
RomPilot Support  
Post Error Pause  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
Enable or disable the RomPilot (the remote  
console and remote drive features during  
OS start-up). If this option is set to  
"Enabled", "Boot-time Diagnostic Screen" is  
unconditionally set to "Enabled".  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
Specify whether to stop POST at the end of  
POST when an error occurs during POST.  
[
]: Factory-set  
TIPS: "RomPilot" is a BIOS feature for communications with the NEC Management  
Workstation Application (NEC MWA). To use the NEC MWA for management of the server,  
select "Enabled" for "RomPilot Support.” Use of the RomPilot features requires setups for  
the NEC MWA.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-12  
Processor Information  
Select "Processor Information" on the Advanced menu to display the following screen.  
Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility  
Advanced  
Processor Information  
Item Specific Help  
Processor 1 Type:  
Processor 2 Type:  
xxxxxxxx  
xxxxxxxx  
-/+ Change Values  
Enter Select Sub-Menu  
F1 Help  
Esc Exit  
F9 Setup Defaults  
F10 Save Changes & Exit  
Select Item  
Select Menu  
See the table below for setup options on the screen.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
Processor 1 Type  
Processor 2 Type  
–
Indicates processor type installed on  
Processor 1 or Processor 2 (view  
only).  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-13  
Memory Information  
Select "Memory Information" on the Advanced menu to display the following screen.  
See the table below for setup options on the screen.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
DIMM #1- #6 Size  
–
Indicates the size of memory installed  
on DIMMs 1 (#1) to 6 (#6). "None"  
indicates no DIMM installed (view  
only).  
DIMM #1- #6 Speed  
–
Indicates the type of DIMM  
(DDR200/DDR266) installed on  
DIMMs 1 (#0) to 6 (#6). "None"  
indicates no DIMM installed (view  
only).  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-14  
Peripheral Configuration  
Select "Peripheral Configuration" on the Advanced menu to display the following screen.  
Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility  
Advanced  
Peripheral Configuration  
Item Specific Help  
Disables serial port 1  
or sets the base  
address/IRQ of  
serial port 1.  
Serial Port A:  
Serial Port B:  
[3F8, IRQ 4]  
[2F8, IRQ 3]  
Select Item  
-/+  
Change Values  
Sub-Menu  
F1  
Esc Exit  
Help  
F9 Setup Defaults  
F10 Save Changes & Exit  
Select Menu  
Enter Select  
See the table below for setup options on the screen.  
IMPORTANT: Make sure to avoid any conflict in the interrupt requests or the base I/O  
addresses.  
Option  
Serial Port A  
Serial Port B  
Parameter  
Disabled  
Description  
Your Setting  
Enable or disable the serial port A and  
B, or specify a base address and  
interrupt.  
3F8, IRQ 3  
[3F8, IRQ 4]*1  
[2F8, IRQ 3]*2  
2F8, IRQ 4  
3E8, IRQ 3  
3E8, IRQ 4  
2E8, IRQ 3  
2E8, IRQ4  
Auto  
*1 Factory setting for the serial port A  
*2 Factory setting for the serial port B  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-15  
Monitoring Configuration  
Select "Monitoring Configuration" on the Advanced menu to display the following screen.  
Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility  
Advanced  
Monitoring Configuration  
Item Specific Help  
Option ROM Scan  
Monitoring features  
Option ROM Scan Monitoring:  
Option ROM Monitoring  
Boot Monitoring:  
[Disabled]  
[5]  
[Enabled]  
[8]  
Boot Monitoring Time-out Period:  
POST Pause Monitoring:  
[Enabled]  
[3]  
POST Pause Monitoring Time-out:  
-/+  
Enter Select  
Change  
Sub-Menu  
F1  
Esc Exit  
F9  
Setup  
Select Item  
F10 Save Changes & Exit  
Select Menu  
Displayed only when "Enabled" is selected for "Option ROM Scan  
Monitoring", "Boot Monitoring" or "POST Pause Monitoring".  
See the table below for setup options on the screen.  
Option  
Option ROM  
Scan Monitoring [Enabled]  
Parameter Description  
Disabled Enable or disable the Option ROM scan monitoring  
feature.  
Your Setting  
Option ROM  
Monitoring  
Time-out  
1 - [5] - 20 Specify the Option ROM monitoring time-out  
period. This option is displayed only when  
"Enabled" is selected for "Option ROM Scan  
Monitoring".  
Boot Monitoring Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Enable or disable the boot monitoring feature. This  
function is unique to the NEC Express5800/ft  
series: detects errors until the OS boots up, and  
immediately reboots the OS upon detection of an  
error. (For details, see “Behavior at Occurrence of  
Error” in Chapter 2.) Enable this function if NEC  
ESMPRO Agent is installed on the OS. Disable this  
function if NEC ESMPRO Agent is not installed or  
when you install the OS. Otherwise, the OS will  
boot up after “Specified boot timeout.”  
Boot Monitoring 1 - [10] - 20 Specify the boot monitoring time-out period. This  
Time-out Period  
option is displayed only when "Enabled" is selected  
for "Boot Monitoring". If you specify a shorter period  
of time to “Boot Monitoring Time-out Period”, the  
time until rebooting can be reduced. When there is  
no external device connected, it is possible to set a  
shorter period of time, but 3 minutes or longer is  
recommended. Appropriate value for the setting  
varies depending on your environment. Therefore,  
when changing this setting, evaluate it thoroughly  
after constructing the environment.  
POST Pause  
Monitoring  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Enable or disable the POST monitoring feature  
during boot-up restriction.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-16  
Option  
Parameter Description  
Your Setting  
POST Pause  
Monitoring  
Time-out  
1 - [3] - 20 Specify the POST monitoring time period during  
boot-up restriction.  
[
]: Factory-set  
IMPORTANT:  
If you set a small value for "Boot Monitoring Time-out Period", you can shorten the waiting  
time to the rebooting. It is recommended to set a value of more than 3 minutes though smaller  
value setting is available when external devices are not used. As it depends on the user’s setting  
environment, make sure to execute enough evaluation after the configuration of the  
environment.  
Option ROM  
Select "Option ROM" on the Advanced menu to display the following screen and enable/disable  
expansion of Option Rom BIOS on the PCI bus.  
Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility  
Advanced  
Option ROM  
Item Specific Help  
Disables/enables the  
mapping of the on-board  
SCSI BIOS.  
On Board SCSI:  
On Board LAN 1:  
On Board LAN 2:  
PCI Slot 1:  
PCI Slot 2:  
PCI Slot 3:  
[Enabled]  
[Enabled]  
[Enabled]  
[Enabled]  
[Enabled]  
[Enabled]  
F1  
Esc Exit  
Help  
-/+  
Change Values  
Sub-Menu  
F9 Setup Defaults  
F10 Save Changes & Exit  
Select Item  
Enter Select  
Select Menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-17  
See the table below for setup options on the screen.  
Option  
On Board SCSI  
Parameter  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Description  
Enable or disable expansion of SCSI  
BIOS on the motherboard.  
Your Setting  
On Board LAN 1, 2  
LAN1: Enable or disable 10/100BASE  
LAN controller on the  
motherboard.  
LAN2: Enable or disable 1000BASE  
PCI Slot 1 - PCI Slot 3  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Enable or disable BIOS on a device  
(board) connected to the PCI bus.  
Select "Enabled" for the graphic  
accelerator board. Select "Disabled"  
for Option ROM of PCI LAN device  
when the network boot feature is not  
used.  
#1:  
#2:  
#3:  
[
]: Factory-set  
IMPORTANT: For the slot which you installed graphical accelerator board, do not specify  
“Disabled”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-18  
Keyboard Features  
Select "Keyboard Features" on the Advanced menu to display the following screen. The NumLock  
submenu allows you to make keyboard settings.  
Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility  
Advanced  
Keyboard Features  
Item Specific Help  
Selects Power-on state  
for Numlock.  
NumLock:  
Key Click:  
[Auto]  
[Disabled]  
Keyboard Auto-repeat Rate:  
Keyboard Auto-repeat Delay:  
[10/sec]  
[1 sec]  
-/+ Change Values  
Enter Select Sub-Menu  
F1 Help  
Esc Exit  
F9 Setup Defaults  
Select Item  
F10 Save Changes & Exit  
Select Menu  
See the table below for setup options on the screen.  
Option  
NumLock  
Parameter  
[Auto]  
On  
Description  
Your Setting  
Enable or disable the NumLock  
feature at system start-up. If "Auto" is  
selected, the NumLock feature will be  
enabled when an entry with the  
keypad is detected.  
Off  
Key Click  
[Disabled]  
Enabled  
2/sec  
Enable or disable the key click sound.  
Keyboard  
Auto-repeat Rate  
Select the number of characters  
repeatedly output in one second when  
a key is pressed.  
6/sec  
[10/sec]  
0.25 sec  
0.5 sec  
0.75 sec  
[1 sec]  
Keyboard  
Auto-repeat Delay  
Select a period before a key character  
starts repeated.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-19  
Security  
Move the cursor onto "Security" to display the Security menu.  
Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility  
Main  
Advanced  
Security  
System Hardware  
Boot  
Exit  
Item Specific Help  
Supervisor Password is  
User Password is  
Clear  
Clear  
Supervisor Password  
controls access to the  
setup utility.  
Set Supervisor Password  
Set User Password  
Password on boot:  
[Enter]  
Enter  
[Disabled]  
Power Switch Mask:  
Option ROM Menu Mask:  
[Unmasked]  
[Unmasked]  
-/+  
Change Values  
Sub-Menu  
F1  
Esc Exit  
Help  
F9 Setup Defaults  
F10 Save Changes & Exit  
Select Item  
Enter Select  
Select Menu  
Select "Set Supervisor Password" or "Set User Password" and press Enter to display the following  
pop-up screen.  
The screen below shows when "Set Supervisor Password" is selected.  
Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility  
Main  
Advanced  
Security  
System Hardware  
Boot  
Exit  
Item Specific Help  
Supervisor Password is  
User Password is  
Clear  
Clear  
Supervisor Password  
controls access to the  
setup utility.  
Set Supervisor Password  
Set User Password  
Password on boot:  
[Enter]  
Enter  
[Disabled]  
Set Supervisor Password  
Power Switch Mask:  
[
Option ROM Menu M
]
]
Enter new password:  
[
Confirm new Password:  
F1  
Esc Exit  
Help  
-/+  
Change Values  
Sub-Menu  
F9 Setup Defaults  
F10 Save Changes & Exit  
Select Item  
Enter Select  
Select Menu  
Set a password on this pop-up screen. Enter a password of up to seven alphanumeric characters and  
symbols from the keyboard.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-20  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀUser password setup is not available before Supervisor password setup.  
ꢀDo not set any password before installing the OS.  
See the table below for setup options on the screen.  
Option  
Supervisor  
Password is  
Parameter  
[Clear]  
Set  
Description  
Indicates Supervisor password setup status (view  
only).  
Your Setting  
User Password [Clear]  
is  
Set Supervisor Up to 7  
Indicates User password setup status (view only).  
Set  
Press Enter to display the supervisor password  
Password  
alphanumeric entry screen. With the supervisor password, all  
characters  
SETUP menus are available for access. This  
option is available only when you log into the  
SETUP utility with the supervisor password.  
Set User  
Up to 7  
Press Enter to display the user password entry  
Password  
alphanumeric screen. With a user password, accessing the  
characters  
SETUP menus is restricted. This option is  
available only if the Supervisor Password is  
specified.  
Password on  
boot  
Enabled  
[Disabled]  
Specify whether to request a password entry at  
boot-up. Supervisor password setup is required  
beforehand. When the supervisor password is  
specified and this option is disabled, the BIOS  
assumes that a system boot attempt is made by a  
user.  
Power Switch  
Mask  
[Unmasked]  
Masked  
Enable or disable the POWER switch on the  
server. If "Masked" is selected, power-off with the  
POWER switch becomes unavailable after OS  
boot-up. (Forced shut down also becomes  
unavailable. Forced shut down is a feature to shut  
down by pressing the POWER switch for over  
four seconds.)  
Option ROM  
Menu Mask  
[Unmasked]  
Masked  
Enable or disable key entries during optional  
ROM expansion.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-21  
System Hardware  
Move the cursor onto "System Hardware" to display the System Hardware menu.  
The table below lists options that you can specify on the System Hardware menu screen and their  
functions. To make a selection for "Thermal Sensor", "Wake On Event", and "Console Redirection",  
first select a desired option and press Enter to display its submenu.  
See the table below for setup options on the screen.  
Option  
AC LINK  
Parameter  
Stay Off  
[Last State]  
Power On  
Description  
Your Setting  
Specify the AC LINK feature by selecting the  
status of the power supply unit of the server  
when the AC power supply restarts. (See the  
table on the next page for details.)  
Waiting time  
for AC-LINK  
[0], 10~3600  
Set maximum waiting time in second for  
AC-LINK. If either of ACs is not supplied in  
time, the system will be turned on as simplex  
config. Value 0 means the system waits  
eternally.  
Range [0 or 10-3600sec.]  
Error Log  
Initialization  
Enter  
Press Enter to initialize the error log. The  
message "Error Log Cleared" appears upon  
successful completion. If failed, the message  
"Error Log Not Cleared!" appears.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-22  
The table below lists how selections for "AC LINK" determine the power status of the server when  
the power supply to the server restarts.  
Parameter  
Last State  
State before powered off  
Stay Off  
Off  
Power On  
In service  
Out of service (DC power: Off)  
Forced shutdown *  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
*
Pressing the POWER switch for over four seconds shuts down the power to the server.  
Thermal Sensor  
Select "Thermal Sensor" on the System Hardware menu and press Enter to display the following  
screen.  
Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility  
System Hardware  
Thermal Sensor  
[Enabled]  
Item Specific Help  
Determines if BIOS will  
disable boot, if the  
temperature is not  
within safe range.  
Thermal Sensor:  
Upper Limit:  
Lower Limit:  
[48]  
[5]  
-/+  
Change Values  
Sub-Menu  
F1 Help  
Esc Exit  
Select Item  
F9 Setup Defaults  
F10 Save Changes & Exit  
Enter Select  
Select Menu  
See the table below for setup options on the screen.  
Option  
Thermal  
Sensor  
Parameter  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
Description  
Enable or disable the thermal sensor  
monitoring feature.  
Your Setting  
Upper Limit  
Lower Limit  
7 - [48] - 80  
Specify the upper limit temperature for  
boot-up restriction in Celsius. Use + and/or -  
keys to specify a value by adding a number  
greater than 7 to the value specified for  
Lower Limit.  
Specify the lower limit temperature for  
boot-up restriction in Celsius. Do not specify  
4 degrees or lower. Use + and/or - keys to  
specify a value by deducting a number  
greater than 7 to the value specified for  
Upper Limit.  
0 - [5] - 73  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-23  
Wake On Events  
Select "Wake On Events" on the System Hardware menu and press Enter to display the following  
screen.  
Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility  
System Hardware  
Wake On Events  
[Enabled]  
Item Specific Help  
Enables Wake On LAN  
support.  
Wake On LAN:  
F1 Help  
Esc Exit  
Select Item  
-/+ Change Values  
Enter Select Sub-Menu  
F9 Setup Defaults  
F10 Save Changes & Exit  
Select Menu  
See the table below for setup options on the screen.  
Option  
Wake On LAN  
Parameter  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Description  
Enable or disable the remote power-on  
feature via the network.  
Your Setting  
[
]: Factory-set  
IMPORTANT: You cannot use this feature on NEC Express5800/ft series (Linux model).  
Use the server without changing the factory settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-24  
Console Redirection  
Select "Console Redirection" on the System Hardware menu and press Enter to display the  
following screen.  
Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility  
System Hardware  
Console Redirection  
[Disabled]  
Item Specific Help  
If enabled, the console  
will be redirected to  
this port.  
Serial Port Address:  
Baud Rate:  
[19.2K]  
Flow Control:  
Console Connection:  
[XON/XOFF]  
[Direct]  
-/+ Change Values  
Enter Select Sub-Menu  
F1 Help  
Esc Exit  
Select Item  
F9 Setup Defaults  
F10 Save Changes & Exit  
Select Menu  
See the table below for setup options on the screen.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
Serial Port  
Address  
[Disabled]  
On-board COM B  
Select a serial port to connect the HW  
console.  
Selecting "On-board COM B" changes  
"Boot-time Diagnostic Screen" to  
"Enabled".  
Baud Rate  
[19.2K]  
57.6K  
Select a baud rate for communications  
with the connected HW console.  
Flow Control  
[None]  
Select a flow control method.  
XON/XOFF  
[Direct]  
Console  
Select a connection with the HW console.  
Connection  
Via modem  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-25  
ft Memory  
Select "ft Memory" on the System Hardware menu and press Enter to display the following screen.  
See the table below for setup options on the screen.  
Option  
Parameter  
Description  
Your Setting  
Size  
[0]  
Size of ft Memory is specified (MB)  
Start Address  
-
Shows the start address of ft Memory (view  
only)  
[
]: Factory-set  
IMPORTANT: You cannot use this feature on NEC Express5800/ft series (Linux model).  
Use the server without changing the factory settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-26  
Boot  
Move the cursor onto "Boot" to display the Boot menu.  
Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility  
Main  
Advanced  
Security  
System Hardware  
Boot  
Exit  
Item Specific Help  
ATAPI CD-ROM Drive  
Removable Device  
Hard Drive  
+
+
Use < >or<  
>to  
select a device, then  
press <+> to move it up  
the list, or < >to  
move it down the list.  
Press <Esc> to exit  
this menu.  
Network (IBA FE Slot 0130 v4110)  
Select Item  
-/+  
Change Values  
F1  
Help  
F9 Setup Defaults  
Esc Exit  
Select Menu  
Enter Select  
Sub-Menu  
F10 Save Changes & Exit  
The server searches for the boot device according to the order specified in this menu and use the  
software to boot the system if found.  
You can change the boot device order using ↑ or ↓ and + or –. Move the cursor to select the device  
by ↑ or ↓, and then change the priority using + or –.  
IMPORTANT: Specify the device boot order as shown above to start the NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-27  
Exit  
Move the cursor onto "Exit" to display the Exit menu.  
Phoenix BIOS Setup Utility  
Main  
Advanced  
Security  
System Hardware  
Boot  
Exit  
Item Specific Help  
Save Changes & Exit  
Exit Without Saving Changes  
Get Default Value  
Exit System Setup and  
save your changes to  
CMOS.  
Load Previous Value  
Save Changes  
Select Item  
Select Menu  
-/+ Change Values  
Enter Select Sub-Menu  
F1 Help  
Esc Exit  
F9 Setup Defaults  
F10 Save Changes & Exit  
The following describes each option on the Exit menu:  
ꢀ Save Changes & Exit  
Select this option to save the current configuration data into the CMOS (non-volatile  
memory) and exit the SETUP utility.  
The following screen appears:  
Setup Confirmation!  
Save configuration changes and exit now?  
[Yes]  
[No]  
Select "Yes" to save the current configuration data into the CMOS (non-volatile memory)  
and exit the SETUP utility. The server will automatically restart the system.  
ꢀ Exit Without Saving Changes  
Select this option to discard the current configuration data and exit the SETUP utility.  
Setup Warning!  
Configuration has not been saved!  
Save before exiting?  
[Yes]  
[No]  
Select "No" to discard the current configuration data and exit the SETUP utility. Select  
"Yes" to save the current configuration data into the CMOS, to exit the SETUP utility, and  
to restart the server automatically.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-28  
ꢀ Get Default Value  
Select this option to restore all default values (factory-set values) of the SETUP utility.  
The following screen appears:  
Setup Confirmation!  
Load default configuration now?  
[Yes]  
[No]  
Select "Yes" to restore default values. Select "No" to return to the Exit menu screen.  
IMPORTANT: The default value slightly differs from the factory-set value. Check  
all setting values before restoring the default value.  
ꢀ Load Previous Values  
Select this option to discard the current configuration data and restore the previous  
configuration data.  
The following screen appears:  
Setup Confirmation!  
Load previous configuration now?  
[Yes]  
[No]  
Select "Yes" to discard the current configuration data and restore the previous one.  
ꢀ Save Changes  
Select this option to save the current configuration data into the CMOS (non-volatile  
memory) and stay on the SETUP utility.  
The following screen appears:  
Setup Confirmation!  
Save configuration changes now?  
[Yes]  
[No]  
Select "Yes" to save the current configuration data into the CMOS (non-volatile memory).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-29  
SCSI BIOS ∼ FAST!UTIL ∼  
For several settings of the SCSI controller on the motherboard, the SCSI BIOS utility "Fast!UTIL"  
is used.  
The SCSI BIOS utility can be started by simple keystrokes during execution of POST without use  
of a special start disk.  
The SCSI BIOS built in the server is set to the optimum at the shipment. Accordingly, the SCSI  
BIOS may not be changed by using this utility.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀ Leave the settings for the SCSI controller to which built-in hard disks are connected as  
they are at shipment. If any of the settings are changed, see the description in this  
document to return to the settings at shipment. The controllers installed in each module  
must be configured individually.  
ꢀ Fast!UTIL of the latest version is installed in the NEC Express5800/ft series. Accordingly,  
the setting screen may be different from that described in this document. See the online  
help or contact your sales agent for the setting items different from those in this document.  
Start  
The procedure of starting Fast!UTIL is described below.  
Notes  
Note the following before starting Fast!UTIL.  
ꢀ Settings for built-in hard disk  
Leave the settings for the built-in hard disk as they are at shipment. The built-in host  
adapter is specified as QLA12160 Ultra3 2000 in the Select Host Adapter dialog box.  
ꢀ Settings of built-in SCSI controller installed in each group  
ꢀ
Mount only the PCI module which has the built-in SCSI controller that you want to  
check the settings and start Fast!UTIL. Remove the other PCI module from the system.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Do not change the factory settings of the built-in SCSI controller.  
Although there may be descriptions that the SCSI BIOS of the host adapter needs to  
be configured in manuals for tape devices, etc., this server does not require  
modifications to the settings. Do not change the settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-30  
Start Procedure  
Start Fast!UTIL in the procedure below:  
19. Turn on the power of the server.  
The start message appears on a screen in the middle of POST.  
20. Press Q and Ctrl together.  
Fast!UTIL is started.  
IMPORTANT: Press these keys before message "QLogic Adapter using IRQ  
number x" or later appears.  
QLogic Corporation  
QLA 1216x PCI SCSI ROM BIOS Version X.XX  
Copyright (C) QLogic Corporation 1993-2001 All rights reserved.  
www.qlogic.com  
Press <CTRL-Q> for Fast!UTIL  
ISP12160 Firmware Version xx.xx.xx  
QLogic Adapter using IRQ number X  
Device Device  
Number Type  
Adapter SCSI SCSI Vendor  
Product Product  
ID Revision  
Number  
ID  
LUN  
ID  
81  
Disk  
0
0
0
SEAGATE ST32550 7394  
21. Highlight "Select Host Adapter" using the cursor keys and press Enter.  
Fast!UTIL Options  
Configuration Settings  
Scan SCSI Bus  
SCSI Disk Utility  
Select Host Adapter  
Exit Fast!UTIL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-31  
22. Select the proper adapter.  
IMPORTANT: The adapter "QLA12160 Ultra3 2000" is used for built-in hard disk.  
Do not select it.  
Highlight the displayed item with the cursor keys and press Enter.  
Select Host Adapter  
Adapter Type  
I/O Address  
The display returns to "Fast!UTIL Options." The name of the selected host adapter  
appears at the upper left corner of the screen.  
Fast!UTIL Options  
Configuration Settings  
Scan SCSI Bus  
SCSI Disk Utility  
Select Host Adapter  
Exit Fast!UTIL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-32  
Configuration Settings  
If you select "Configuration Settings" from the "Fast!UTIL Options" menu, the screen for setting  
the configuration appears.  
Configuration Settings  
Host Adapter Settings  
SCSI Device Settings  
SCSI Bus Settings  
Autoconfigure SCSI Device  
Selectable Boot Settings  
Restore Default Adapter Settings  
Raw Nvram Data  
Host Adapter Settings  
If you put the cursor on "Host Adapter Settings" with keyboard cursors (↓ and ↑) in the  
"Configuration Settings" menu and press Enter, the screen for setting the information on the host  
adapter appears.  
The table below shows the parameters of the setting items and their factory settings.  
Submenu item  
BIOS Address  
BIOS Revision  
Adapter Serial Number  
Interrupt level  
Parameter Description  
-
View only  
View only  
View only  
View only  
-
-
-
Host Adapter BIOS  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
Enabled  
[Disabled]  
[Auto]  
Specify whether the BIOS extension of the host  
adapter is enabled or disabled.  
PCI Bus DMA Burst  
CDROM Boot  
Specify whether the DMA burst transfer on the PCI  
bus is enabled or disabled.  
Specify whether the start from CD-ROM is enabled or  
disabled.  
Adapter Configuration  
Specify whether the adapter configuration is set  
automatically by BIOS, manually, or safely.  
Manual  
Safe  
Drivers Load RISC  
>4GByte Addressing  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
Enabled  
[Disabled]  
Specify whether the load of RISC codes is enabled or  
disabled.  
Specify whether hard disks of 4 GB or larger is used  
or not.  
Fast Command Porting [Enabled]  
Disabled  
Do not change the factory setting.  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-33  
SCSI Device Settings  
If you put the cursor on "SCSI Device Settings" with keyboard cursors (↓ and ↑) in the  
"Configuration Settings" menu and press Enter, the screen for setting the information on the device  
connected to the host adapter appears.  
The table below shows the parameters of the setting items and their factory settings.  
IMPORTANT: The settings can be made for each SCSI bus.  
Submenu item Parameter  
SCSI Bus0  
Disconnects OK [Yes]  
No*  
Description  
SCSI Bus1  
[Yes]  
No  
Specify whether the disconnection of  
SCSI devices from the SCSI bus is  
enabled or disabled.  
* On Bus0, select "No" for ID8.  
Check Parity  
Enable LUNs  
Enable PPR  
Enable Device  
[Yes]  
No  
[Yes]  
No  
[Yes]  
No  
[Yes]  
No  
[Yes]  
No  
[Yes]  
No  
[Yes]  
No  
[Yes]  
No  
Specify whether the parity check is  
provided or not.  
Specify whether more than one LUN  
numbers are given to SCSI ID.  
Do not change the factory setting.  
Do not change the factory setting.  
Negotiate Wide [Yes]  
No  
[Yes]  
No  
Specify whether the wide (32 bits)  
transfer is enabled or disabled.  
Negotiate  
Synchronous  
[Yes]  
No  
[Yes]  
No  
Specify whether the synchronous  
transfer is enabled or disabled.  
Tagged Queuing [Yes]  
No  
[Yes]  
No  
Do not change the factory setting.  
Sync Offset  
00, 02, 04, 06, 08, 00, 02, 04, 06, [08], Select the proper offset value in  
10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, synchronous transfer.  
20, 22, [24]  
20, 22, 24  
Sync Period  
Transfer Rate  
Transfer Rate Select the proper speed in  
(Mbytes/sec)  
(Mbytes/sec) synchronous transfer.  
[9] 160 (Ultra3  
SCSI)  
9
160 (Ultra3  
SCSI)  
10 80 (Ultra2  
SCSI)  
[10] 80 (Ultra2  
SCSI)  
12 40 (Ultra  
SCSI)  
12 40 (Ultra  
SCSI)  
25 20 (Fast  
SCSI)  
25 20 (Fast  
SCSI)  
40 12.5  
40 12.5  
Exec Throttle  
1, 4, 8, [16], 32,  
64, 128, 255  
1, 4, 8, [16], 32, 64, Do not change the factory setting.  
128, 255  
[
]: Factory-set  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-34  
SCSI Bus Settings  
If you put the cursor on "SCSI Bus Settings" with keyboard cursors (↓ and ↑) in the "Configuration  
Settings" menu and press Enter, the screen for setting the information on the SCSI bus of the host  
adapter appears.  
The table below shows the parameters of the setting items and their factory settings.  
IMPORTANT: The settings can be made for each SCSI bus.  
Submenu item  
Parameter  
SCSI Bus0  
Description  
SCSI Bus1  
SCSI Bus SCSI ID 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, Select the SCSI ID given to SCSI  
[7], 8, 9, 10, 11,  
12, 13, 14, 15  
[7], 8, 9, 10, 11,  
12, 13, 14, 15  
bus.  
SCSI Bus Reset  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
Make the reset valid or invalid in  
SCSI buses.  
SCSI Bus Reset  
Delay  
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, [5],  
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11,  
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, [5],  
Leave this item as factory-set.  
12, 13, 14, 15  
12, 13, 14, 15  
SCSI Bus  
Termination  
Auto  
[Auto]  
Set the termination resistance of  
SCSI bus.  
High only  
Disabled  
[Enabled]  
High only  
Disabled  
Enabled  
[
]: Factory-set  
Autoconfigure SCSI Device  
If you put the cursor on "Autoconfigure SCSI Device" with keyboard cursors (↓ and ↑) in the  
"Configuration Settings" menu and press Enter, the screen for setting the information on the device  
connected to the host adapter appears.  
The parameters of the setting items and their factory settings are the same as those shown in the  
table for "SCSI Device Settings."  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀThe settings can be made for each SCSI bus and SCSI ID. Check the SCSI ID of the target  
device before changing the settings.  
ꢀThe factory settings are the same for both SCSI bus 0 and SCSI bus 1.  
ꢀThe following items can be changed by setting "Adapter Configuration" in "Autoconfigure  
SCSI Device" to "Manual."  
– Enable Device  
– Enable LUNs  
– Negotiate Wide  
– Negotiate Sync  
– Tagged Queuing  
– Sync Offset  
– Sync Period  
– Exec Throttle  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-35  
Selectable Boot Settings  
If you put the cursor on "Selectable Boot Settings" with keyboard cursors (↓ and ↑) in the  
"Configuration Settings" menu and press Enter, the screen for setting the information on the start  
from the device connected to the host adapter appears.  
Submenu item Parameter  
Description  
Selectable  
SCSI Boot  
Enabled  
[Disabled]  
Specify whether the boot from SCSI device can be  
selected or not.  
SCSI Bus  
[0]  
1
Select the bus to which the started SCSI device is  
connected.  
SCSI Boot ID  
[0], 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,  
8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13,  
14, 15  
Set the SCSI ID of the started SCSI device.  
SCSI Boot Lun [0], 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,  
8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13,  
Select the number of the LUN to which the started  
SCSI device is bound.  
14, 15  
[
]: Factory-set  
Restore Default Settings  
If you put the cursor on "Restore Default Settings" with keyboard cursors (↓ and ↑) in the  
"Configuration Settings" menu and press Enter, the display changes to the screen for returning the  
setting values to the default values.  
IMPORTANT: The default values can be restored for each SCSI bus.  
Raw Nvram Data  
If you put the cursor on "Raw Nvram Data" with keyboard cursors (↓ and ↑) in the "Configuration  
Settings" menu and press Enter, the information on NvRAM installed in the host adapter is  
displayed in the hexadecimal format.  
This function is provided to solve problems. The information cannot be edited.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-36  
Scan SCSI Bus  
If you select "Scan SCSI Bus" from the "Fast!UTIL Options" menu, the list of devices connected to  
each SCSI bus is displayed in the order of SCSI IDs. The information to be displayed includes the  
device manufacturer, product name and firmware revision.  
SCSI Disk Utility  
If you select "SCSI Disk Utility" from the "Fast!UTIL Options" menu, the utility menu which is  
used to format or verify the connected SCSI devices appears.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀDevices can be processed in each SCSI bus and SCSI ID. Be careful not to forget the  
selected bus and ID.  
ꢀWhen performing low-level format, select [Advanced]-[Monitoring Configuration]-[Option  
ROM Scan Monitoring] and choose “Disabled” in BIOS setup utility. See “SYSTEM BIOS  
~ SETUP ~” (page 4-2) for details of the setting.  
ꢀThe selection of "Continue With Format" in "Low- Level Format" causes all data in disks to  
be lost.  
ꢀ Low-Level Format  
Formats the device selected in "Continue With Format" physically. If you select "Do Not  
Format Disk," the previous menu appears again.  
ꢀ Verify Disk Media  
Verifies the device selected in "Continue With Verify." If you select "Do Not Verify  
Media," the previous menu appears again.  
ꢀ Select Different Disk  
Selects another SCSI device on the same SCSI bus.  
Select Host Adapter  
If you select "Select Host Adapter" from the "Fast!UTIL Options" menu, the list of the host adapters  
installed in the main system is displayed. Select an adapter to change its settings.  
IMPORTANT: The adapter "QLA12160 Ultra3 2000" is used for built-in hard disk. Do not  
select it.  
The utility menu, which is used to format or verify the connected SCSI devices, appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-37  
Exit Fast!UTIL ∼ Termination and Storage of Fast!UTIL ∼  
After changing the settings, press Esc several times to display the "Fast!UTIL Options" menu. If  
you select "Exit Fast!UTIL" from the menu, the screen for terminating Fast!UTIL appears.  
However, if the settings are different from those before the start, the screen prompting you to save  
the settings appears before the display of the termination screen.  
Configuration settings modified  
Save Changes  
Do not save changes  
Select either "Save changes" or "Do not save changes" by using keyboard cursors (↓ and ↑) and  
press Enter.  
Pressing Enter causes the screen for terminating Fast!UTIL to appear.  
Exit Fast!UTIL  
Reboot System  
Return to Fast!UTIL  
Select either "Reboot System" or "Return to Fast!UTIL" and press Enter.  
Setting List for Optional SCSI Device  
If you add an optional SCSI device, do not change the factory settings of built-in SCSI controller.  
For information on optimal SCSI devices for NEC Express5800/ft series, contact your sales agent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-38  
FORCED SHUTDOWN AND CLEAR  
Read this section if your server does not operate as expected, or if you want to return all setup  
values to those made at shipment.  
Forced Shutdown  
Use this function when an OS command does not shut down the server, the POWER switch does not  
turn off the server, or resetting does not work.  
Press and hold the POWER switch on the server for over four seconds. The power is forcibly turned  
off. To turn on the power back again, wait approximately 30 seconds after turning off the power  
(forced shutdown).  
<Rack-mount model>  
Press it for over 4 seconds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-39  
Clear CMOS / Password (Configuring Motherboard Jumpers)  
With the pre-installed SETUP utility, you can set desired passwords to protect data stored on the  
server from unauthorized user access. If you forget the passwords, you can clear them by following  
the procedure described in this section.  
You can also use the same procedure to clear the CMOS data in the server.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀClearing the CMOS data restores the factory settings.  
ꢀTo clear passwords or CMOS data, power off the server.  
To clear passwords or the CMOS data, use the jumper switch on the PCI module board of the server.  
The following figure illustrates the jumper switch location.  
IMPORTANT: Do not change any other jumper switch settings. Any improper change may  
cause the server to fail or malfunction.  
Use clips on  
pins 11 and 12  
Pins for protecting/clearing  
passwords  
Pins for protecting/clearing  
CMOS data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-40  
ꢀ Pins for protecting/clearing the passwords  
Place the clip on the two pins to clear the passwords.  
Remove the clip from these pins to protect the passwords (factory-set).  
ꢀ Pins for protecting/clearing the CMOS data  
Place the clip on the two pins to clear the CMOS data.  
Remove the clip from these pins to protect the CMOS data (factory-set).  
The following describe the clearing procedure.  
WARNING  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. There are risks of  
death or serious personal injury. See PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY in Chapter  
1.  
ꢀ
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.  
How to Clear CMOS  
23. Power off the NEC Express5800/ft series and unplug the both power cords.  
24. Remove the both PCI modules (#1 and #2) from the NEC Express5800/ft series (see page  
8-31 “Removing PCI Module”).  
25. Open the top cover of the PCI Module #1.  
26. Make setting of jumper switch for clearing CMOS.  
Remove the clips from the jumper pins 11-12 and place them on the jumper pins 1-2 on  
the PCI Module #1.  
27. Mount only the PCI Module #1 to the NEC Express5800/ft series (see page 8-33  
“Installing PCI Module”).  
28. Plug the both power cords and when the POWER Switch LED turns on, press it to power  
on the server.  
29. When the following message appears after startup, press [CONTINUE].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-41  
TIPS:  
A message informing you of the completion of CMOS clear and prompting you to  
clear CMOS will appear for 10 seconds. Note that even if you do not do anything,  
the process goes on and the server will be rebooted automatically.  
30. If the message [Non volatile memory cleared] appears after rebooting and during POST,  
turn off the power by pressing the POWER switch and unplug the both power cords.  
Non volatile memory cleared:  
This message indicates that CMOS is cleared properly.  
IMPORTANT:  
If the message [Non volatile memory cleared] appears at normal startup, the jumper  
switch is set for clearing CMOS. Change back the jumper switch setting.  
31. Remove the PCI Module #1 from NEC Express5800/ft series (see page 8-31 “Removing  
PCI Module”).  
32. Reset the jumper switch setting.  
Remove the clips from the jumper pins 1-2 and place them on the jumper pins 11-12 on  
the PCI Module #1.  
TIPS: If you place clips on other pins, the server may malfunction.  
33. Mount the PCI Module #1 again to NEC Express5800/ft series (see page 8-33 “Installing  
PCI Module”) and plug the power cord to the AC inlet B (for Group1).  
34. Likewise, mount the PCI Module #2 to NEC Express5800/ft series and plug the power  
cord to the AC inlet A (for Group2).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-42  
35. Shortly after you connect the both power cords, the BMC status LED of PCI Module #2  
will start to blink.  
When the BMC status LED goes off, the clear information of the PCI Module #1 is  
reflected to the PCI Module #2.  
CHECK:  
The BMC status LED blinks to show that synchronous processing is being  
performed between the two modules. When this process is complete, CMOS has  
also been cleared on PCI Module #2  
TIPS:  
ꢀ For the location of the AC inlet A, the AC inlet B, see “Names and Functions of  
Components” in Chapter 2.  
ꢀ For the location of the BMC status LED, see “Names and Functions of  
Components” in Chapter 2.  
ꢀ For description of the BMC status LED, see “LEDs” in Chapter 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-43  
How to Clear Passwords  
36. Power off NEC Express5800/ft series and unplug the both power cords.  
37. Remove the both PCI modules (#1 and #2) from the NEC Express5800/ft series (see page  
8-31 “Removing PCI Module”).  
38. Open the top cover of the PCI Module #1.  
39. Make setting of jumper switch for clearing the password.  
Remove the clips from the jumper pins 11-12 and place them on the jumper pins 3-4 on  
the PCI Module #1.  
40. Mount the PCI Module #1 to NEC Express5800/ft series (see page 8-33 “Installing PCI  
Module”).  
41. Plug the both power cords and when the POWER Switch LED turns on, press it to power  
on NEC Express5800/ft series.  
42. When the following POST screen appears after the startup, press the POWER Switch to  
turn off the power.  
43. Unplug the both power cords.  
44. Remove PCI Module #1 from NEC Express5800/ft series (see page 8-31 “Removing PCI  
Module”).  
45. Reset the jumper switch setting.  
Remove the clips from the jumper pins 3-4 and place them on the jumper pins 11-12 on  
the PCI Module #1.  
TIPS: If you place it on other pins, the server may malfunction.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-44  
46. Mount the PCI Module #1 again to the NEC Express5800/ft series (see page 8-33  
“Installing PCI Module”) and plug the power cord to the AC inlet B (for Group1). (The  
POWER Switch LED will be turned on.)  
47. Likewise, mount the PCI Module #2 to the NEC Express5800/ft series and plug the power  
cord to the AC inlet A (for Group2).  
48. Shortly after you connect the both power cords, the BMC status LED on PCI Module #2  
will start to blink.  
When Password clear is completed, the BMC status LED will go off.  
CHECK:  
The BMC status LED blinks to show that synchronous processing is being  
performed between the two modules. When this process is complete, Password has  
also been cleared on PCI Module #2.  
TIPS:  
ꢀ For the location of the AC inlet A, the AC inlet B, see “Names and Functions of  
Components” in Chapter 2.  
ꢀ For the location of the BMC status LED, see “Names and Functions of  
Components” in Chapter 2.  
ꢀ For description of the BMC status LED, see “LEDs” in Chapter 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5  
Installing and Using Utilities  
This section describes how to use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM that comes with your  
server and to install the utilities stored on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-2  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, integrated setup software, can automatically detect the hardware  
connected to an NEC Express5800/ft series machine to advance the processing. The hardware  
subject to setup with the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER should have the same configuration as that for  
operation.  
Start Menu  
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER provides three procedures to start the server as described below. The  
menus and items appearing on the screen vary depending on the procedures.  
ꢀ Booting (starting) the server from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM  
For the procedure, insert the NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the  
CD-ROM drive of the NEC Express5800/ft series  
and start the NEC Express5800/ft series from the  
system in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER. When  
the NEC Express5800/ft series is started by using  
this procedure, the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top  
menu shown on the right appears.  
Perform the NEC Express5800/ft series setup  
from this menu.  
IMPORTANT: Don’t use this CD-ROM on computers other than NEC Express5800/ft  
series with which it is packaged (including other NEC Express5800 models). Otherwise,  
a breakdown may result.  
See "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu" for details.  
ꢀ
Booting (starting) the server from  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in  
the consoleless state  
If the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is  
started from the CD-ROM drive in the  
server with the keyboard, mouse, and/or  
display unit not connected to the server,  
the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Tools  
Menu shown on the right appears on the  
screen of the management computer (PC)  
connected to the server through LAN or  
COM (serial port).  
Then operate the server remotely from the management PC by using the items in the menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-3  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀ
Don’t use this CD-ROM on computers other than NEC Express5800/ft series with  
which it is packaged (including other NEC Express5800 models). Otherwise, a  
breakdown may result.  
ꢀ
To use the consoleless feature, make sure that keyboard is not connected to the server.  
When a keyboard is connected, the consoleless feature is disabled because the NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER determines that the server has a console. (The menu will not be  
displayed on the management PC.)  
See "Consoleless Menu" described later for details.  
ꢀ Inserting NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM after Windows startup  
The "Master Control Menu" (see figure below) starts automatically after you place the "NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER" in the CD-ROM drive. A dialog box called “Master Control Menu” will  
appear.  
For this dialog, see “Master Control Menu” described later.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-4  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu  
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top menu is used for the setup of hardware and the setup and  
installation of OS.  
Start  
Start the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top menu following the procedure below:  
49. Turn on the powers of peripherals and the power of the server in this order.  
50. Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.  
51. After the CD-ROM is inserted, reset the system (by pressing Ctrl + Alt + Delete) or turn  
off the power and then on again to restart the server.  
The system is activated from the CD-ROM to start the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
After the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is started, the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top menu shown  
below appears.  
A
B
C
A Tools  
Starts each of the utilities stored in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER individually to allow the  
operator to provide setup. Enables the setup without influence of installed OS.  
B Help  
Describes the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER. We recommend you to read through the help  
before the setup.  
C Exit  
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER termination screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-5  
Tools  
The Tools Menu is used to start each of the several utilities stored in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
CD-ROM individually for manual setup by operator. Use the Tools Menu to provide settings that the  
setup program cannot do automatically or detailed settings. Also use the Tools Menu when system  
diagnosis is performed or a support disk is created. The items in the Tools Menu are described  
below.  
NEC Express5800 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Ver3. xxxx-x Copyright (C) NEC Corporation 2004  
Tools Menu  
RAID Board: None  
Maint Part: None  
Off-line Maintenance Utility  
System Diagnostics  
Create Support Disk  
BIOS/FW/etc. Update  
System Management  
Help  
Return to the Top Menu  
ꢀ Off-line Maintenance Utility  
Off-line Maintenance Utility is an OS-dependent maintenance program that performs preventive  
maintenance and error analysis for your server. See Chapter 6 or the online help for details.  
ꢀ System Diagnostics  
Executes several tests on the main system to examine the features of the system and the  
connections between the system and extension boards. If the system diagnosis is executed, the  
system check program is started depending on the system status. See the description in Chapter  
6 to manipulate the system check program  
ꢀ Create Support Disk  
In the support disk creation procedure, the starting support disk for starting a utility within the  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from a floppy disk and the support disk required in the installation  
of the operating system can be created. If you write down the titles appearing on the screen on  
the floppy disk labels, they can be easily managed later.  
The customer should prepare the floppy disks for creating the support disks.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ROM-DOS Startup FD  
The support disk for starting the ROM-DOS system is created.  
Off-line Maintenance Utility FD  
Creates a support disk for activating the Off-line Maintenance Utility.  
System Diagnostics Utility FD  
The support disk for starting the system check program is created.  
System Management Function FD  
The support disk for system management functions is created.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-6  
ꢀ BIOS/FW/etc. Update  
The program which is necessary for the update work is transferred to the floppy disk which the  
various update modules of BIOS/FW were stored in. After the reboot, an update program is  
started automatically from the floppy disk, and various BIOS/FW's are updated.  
IMPORTANT: During the execution of the update program, do not turn off the power  
of the system. If the update is interrupted halfway, the system will not be able to be  
started.  
ꢀ System Management functions  
Allow you to make settings of BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) to use its report  
functions and remote control from the management PC.  
ꢀ Help  
Indicates the descriptions on several features of the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
ꢀ Return to the Top Menu  
Indicates the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-7  
Consoleless Menu  
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER contains the "consoleless" feature that enables configuration of the  
server by remote operation from the management PC, even if a console device such as keyboard is  
not connected to the server.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Don’t use this CD-ROM on computers other than NEC Express5800/ft series with  
which it is packaged (including other NEC Express5800 models). Otherwise, a  
breakdown may result.  
To use the consoleless feature, make sure that keyboard is not connected to the server.  
When a keyboard is connected, the consoleless feature is disabled because the NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER determines that the server has a console. (The menu will not be  
displayed on the management PC.)  
Starting  
Depending on the connection between the management PC and the main unit, there are two ways  
for startup:  
ꢀ Startup from the management PC connected to LAN  
ꢀ Startup from the management PC directly connected (serial port B)  
For startup procedures, see “Remote Management Configuration for the Server without Console”  
described later in this chapter.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀDo not change the boot device order in the BOOT menu of BIOS SETUP. The consoleless  
feature cannot be used if the CD-ROM drive is not the first device to launch the system.  
ꢀFor LAN connection, you can only use LAN port 1.  
ꢀFor direct connection, you can only use Serial port B.  
ꢀFor consoleless remote operation of the NEC Express5800/ft series, you need to save  
configuration information to a floppy disk. Prepare a formatted floppy disk.  
TIPS: BIOS will be set as follows:  
ꢀRomPilot Support:  
ꢀSerial Port B:  
ꢀSerial Port Address:  
ꢀBaud Rate:  
[Enabled]  
[2F8, IRQ3]  
[On-board COM B]  
[19.2K]  
ꢀFlow Control:  
[None]  
ꢀConsole Connection:  
[Direct]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-8  
Menu Items  
Only the menu items available in consoleless operation are extracted from the NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu. See the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu described earlier for  
each function.  
1
2
3
1
2
3
See the "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu".  
Shows detailed explanation of each function.  
Terminate the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀThe following functions differ from the Tools Menu in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top  
Menu.  
– Contents and operations of System Diagnostics (see "System Diagnostics" in Chapter 6  
for details.)  
– Disk type created in "Created Support Disk".  
ꢀSystem Diagnostics Utility  
When no keyboard is connected to the server, the System Diagnostic window is not  
displayed on the local console. Make sure to connect the keyboard to the server if you  
work on this utility from the local console.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-9  
Master Control Menu  
Load the attached “NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER” CD-ROM in the  
CD-ROM drive of the computer that runs  
Windows (Windows 95 or later, or Windows  
NT 4.0 or later). The Master Control Menu  
starts automatically.  
TIPS: The Master Control Menu may not  
start automatically depending on the system  
status. In such case, execute the following file  
on the CD-ROM from the explorer, etc.  
\MC\1ST.EXE  
From the Master Control Menu, you can install various kinds of attached software that runs on  
Windows and view online documents.  
TIPS: Some online documents are provided in the PDF format. To view these files, you  
need to install Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader of Adobe Systems Incorporated in advance.  
If either is not installed, click [Setup] – [Acrobat Reader] first to install Acrobat Reader.  
For the Master Control Menu operations, click each item displayed on the window, or use the  
shortcut menu displayed by right-clicking the screen.  
IMPORTANT: Make sure to exit online documents and tools started from the Master  
Control Menu or menu before removing the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-10  
NEC ESMPRO Agent and Manager  
NEC Express5800/ft series system management applications "NEC ESMPRO Manager" is bundled  
to accessory CD-ROM "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" and "NEC ESMPRO Agent" is bundled to  
Linux for NEC Express5800/ft series Back Up CD-ROM.  
This manual describes the functions and features provided by NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC  
ESMPRO Agent and the notes on their operations.  
These applications are necessary for continuous operation of NEC Express5800/ft series.  
Overview  
NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent are the server management software provided  
for the stable operation of a server system and effective system operations. They can manage the  
configuration information and operating status of server resources to prevent server faults from  
occurring. If a server fault occurs, they detect the fault to notify the system Administrator of the  
occurrence. This enables the system Administrator to take appropriate action against faults.  
ꢀ Importance of server management  
“Constantly stable operation” and “less management workload” are keywords in server  
management.  
ꢀ
Stable operation of server  
Shutdown of a server immediately leads the customer to lose business opportunities  
and profits. This requires servers to always operate in their perfect state. If a fault  
occurs in a server, it is necessary to detect the occurrence as soon as possible, make  
clear the cause, and take appropriate action. The shorter the time taken from the  
occurrence of a fault to the recovery from the fault is, the smaller the loss of profits  
(and/or costs) is.  
ꢀ
Load reduction of server management  
The server management requires many jobs. In particular, if the system becomes large  
or remote servers are used, required jobs increase further. The reduction of the load of  
the server management brings the decrease in costs (and thus customer's benefit).  
ꢀ What are NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent?  
NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent are server management software used  
to manage and monitor NEC Express5800 series systems on the network. The installation  
of NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent enables the server configuration,  
performance, and fault information to be acquired, managed, and monitored realtime and  
also the occurrence of a fault to be detected immediately by the alert report function.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-11  
ꢀ Effects of using NEC ESMPRO Manager and Agent  
NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent have sufficient effects on a variety of  
needs in versatile and complicated system environments.  
ꢀ
Detection of server fault  
NEC ESMPRO Agent collects a variety of fault information on NEC Express5800  
series systems to identify the states of the systems. If a server detects a fault, the  
server provides NEC ESMPRO Manager with the proper alert report.  
ꢀ
Prevention of server fault  
NEC ESMPRO Agent includes the preventive maintenance function predicting the  
occurrence of a fault in advance as countermeasures for preventing faults from  
occurring. It can previously detect the increase in the cabinet temperature and the  
empty capacity in a file system.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Management of server operation status  
NEC ESMPRO Agent can acquire the detailed hardware configuration and  
performance information on NEC Express5800 series systems. The acquired  
information can be viewed at any point through NEC ESMPRO Manager.  
Collective management of distributed servers  
NEC ESMPRO Manager provides the GUI interface that allows servers distributed  
on the network to be managed efficiently.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-12  
Detection of Server Fault  
NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent detect errors causing faults to occur at an early  
stage and notify Administrators of fault information real-time.  
ꢀ Early detection of error  
If a fault occurs, NEC ESMPRO Agent detects the fault and reports the occurrence of the  
fault to NEC ESMPRO Manager (alert report). NEC ESMPRO Manager displays the  
received alert in the alert viewer and also changes the status colors of the server and server  
component in which the fault occurs. This allows you to identify the fault at a glance.  
Further, checking the content of the fault and the countermeasures, you can take  
appropriate action for the fault as soon as possible.  
ꢀ Types of reported faults  
The table below lists the typical faults reported by NEC ESMPRO Agent.  
Component  
Reported information  
CPU  
•
•
CPU load is over the threshold  
CPU degrading, etc.  
Memory  
ECC 1-bit error detection, etc.  
Power supply  
•
•
Voltage lowering  
Power failure, etc.  
Temperature  
Fan  
Storage  
LAN  
Temperature increase in cabinet, etc.  
Fan failure (decrease in the number of revolutions), etc.  
File system usage rate, etc.  
•
•
Line fault threshold over  
Send retry or send abort threshold over, etc.  
Prevention of Server Fault  
NEC ESMPRO Agent includes the preventive maintenance function forecasting the occurrence of a  
fault as countermeasures for preventing faults from occurring.  
NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent can set the threshold for each source in the  
server. If the value of a source exceeds the threshold, NEC ESMPRO Agent reports the alert to NEC  
ESMPRO Manager.  
The preventive maintenance function can be set for a variety of monitoring items including cabinet  
temperature, and CPU usage rate.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-13  
Management of Server Operation Status  
NEC ESMPRO Agent manages and monitors a variety of components installed in the server. You  
can view the information managed and monitored by NEC ESMPRO Agent on the data viewer of  
NEC ESMPRO Manager.  
NEC ESMPRO Agent also manages and monitors all the components and conditions required to  
keep the server reliability at a high level such as hard disks, CPU, memory, fans, power supply, and  
temperature.  
Below is a list of functions of data viewer’s items and their availability if NEC ESMPRO Agent is  
installed.  
Function name  
Supported  
Function description  
Hardware  
Function to display physical information of hardware  
Function to display physical information of memory  
Function to display device-specific information  
c
c
Memory bank  
Device  
Information  
c
c
CPU  
Function to display physical information of CPU  
System  
Function to view logical information or monitor load  
rate of CPU  
c
Function to view logical information or monitor status of  
memory  
I/O device  
Function to view information of I/O devices (floppy disk  
drive, serial port, parallel port, keyboard, mouse and  
video)  
c
System environment  
Function to monitor temperature, fan, voltage, power,  
door, etc.  
∆
Temperature  
Fan  
Function to monitor the temperature inside the cabinet  
Function to monitor fan  
c
c
c
¯
Voltage  
Power  
Function to monitor the voltage inside the cabinet  
Function to monitor power unit  
Door  
Function to monitor the Chassis Intrusion (open/close  
of the cover/door on the cabinet)  
¯
c
c
Software  
Network  
Function to view information of service, driver, OS  
Function to view information about network (LAN) and  
monitor packets  
Extension device  
BIOS  
Function to view information of extension bus device  
Function to view BIOS information  
c
c
Local polling  
Function to monitor any MIB item value which the  
agents get  
c
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-14  
Function name  
Supported  
Function description  
Storage  
Function to monitor storage devices (e.g., hard disk  
drive) and controller  
¯
File system  
Disk array  
Other  
Function to view file system configuration and monitor  
usage rate  
c
Function to monitor disk array system of LSI Logic  
Corporation  
¯
c
Supports OS stall monitoring by Watch Dog Timer  
c: Supported ∆: Partly supported ¯: Not supported  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-15  
Monitoring of NEC Express5800/ft series  
NEC Express5800/ft series is a fault tolerant system. It can continue the operation even if a major  
component fails. NEC Express5800/ft series improves the system availability with the hardware,  
NEC ESMPRO, and system software functions.  
If a major component fails, the NEC ESMPRO fault report function can notify the system  
Administrator of the occurrence of the fault. In addition, the data viewer of NEC ESMPRO  
Manager can monitor the system status and also identify the failed component.  
NEC ESMPRO provides several maintenance functions such as the update of F/W and BIOS in the  
NEC Express5800/ft series in the online state (in which the system continues the operation but the  
components used to update F/W or BIOS is suspended) and the suspension of a specific component.  
The table below lists the NEC Express5800/ft series management tasks using NEC ESMPRO and  
system functions.  
NEC ESMPRO function or  
tool  
NEC ESMPRO function or tool  
(on management manager)  
NEC Express5800/ft  
series management task  
(on managed NEC  
Express5800/ft series)  
Monitoring of major  
component states  
NEC ESMPRO Manager  
data viewer  
–
Diagnosis and start/stop of  
major components and F/W  
update  
NEC ESMPRO Agent  
ft server utility  
NEC ESMPRO Manager  
data viewer  
BMC F/W update  
NEC ESMPRO Agent  
BMC F/W update utility  
syslog  
–
Confirmation of alert or  
confirmation of fault  
occurrence event  
information  
NEC ESMPRO Manager  
Alert Viewer  
Confirmation of H/W error  
log  
NEC ESMPRO Agent  
–
The report of a fault occurrence in the NEC Express5800/ft series (alert) is immediately sent to the  
NEC ESMPRO Manager. When the NEC ESMPRO Manager receives the alert, a popup message  
appears.  
The alert contains the detailed information of the fault and the proper countermeasures. You can  
take the appropriate action for the alert.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-16  
.
Collective Management of Distributed Servers  
The excellent GUI provided by NEC ESMPRO Manager allows servers on a network to be  
managed collectively. The management screen is designed in the Explorer format to indicate the  
components in a server hierarchically for effective server management.  
NEC ESMPRO Manager manages servers by using the following three types of GUIs.  
ꢀ Operation Window  
The operation window is used to create the  
map of servers connected to network to  
manage them. The map can be multi-layered  
depending on the installation areas,  
organizations, and objects.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-17  
ꢀ Data Viewer  
The data viewer indicates the server source configuration information in the Explorer format. In  
addition, it changes the status color of the failed server component. This enables you to identify  
the failed portion.  
ꢀ Alert Viewer  
The Alert Viewer manages fault reports sent from servers together. A fault occurred in a server  
is immediately reported to the Alert Viewer.  
The Administrator can recognize all faults on the network instantly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-18  
NEC ESMPRO Agent  
Device ID in Alert Report  
Some NEC Express5800/ft series reports use unique device IDs which correspond to the devices  
listed in the table below as the device identification information.  
Device name  
CPU module 1  
Device ID  
0
DIMM1 on CPU module 1  
DIMM2 on CPU module 1  
DIMM3 on CPU module 1  
DIMM4 on CPU module 1  
DIMM5 on CPU module 1  
DIMM6 on CPU module 1  
CPU1 on CPU module 1  
CPU2 on CPU module 1  
Power supply unit on CPU module 1  
CPU module 3  
0/0  
0/1  
0/2  
0/3  
0/4  
0/5  
0/20  
0/21  
0/100  
2
DIMM1 on CPU module 3  
DIMM2 on CPU module 3  
DIMM3 on CPU module 3  
DIMM4 on CPU module 3  
DIMM5 on CPU module 3  
DIMM6 on CPU module 3  
CPU1 on CPU module 3  
CPU2 on CPU module 3  
Power supply unit on CPU module 3  
PCI module 1  
2/0  
2/1  
2/2  
2/3  
2/4  
2/5  
2/20  
2/21  
2/100  
10  
PCI slot 1 on PCI module 1  
PCI slot 2 on PCI module 1  
PCI slot 3 on PCI module 1  
PCI slot 4 on PCI module 1  
PCI slot 5 on PCI module 1  
PCI slot 6 on PCI module 1  
PCI slot 7 on PCI module 1  
SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module 1  
Ethernet Board 1 on PCI module 1  
Ethernet Board 2 on PCI module 1  
Power supply unit on PCI module 1  
PCI module 2  
10/0  
10/1  
10/2  
10/3  
10/4  
10/5  
10/6  
10/5  
10/3  
10/6  
10/100  
11  
PCI slot 1 on PCI module 2  
PCI slot 2 on PCI module 2  
PCI slot 3 on PCI module 2  
PCI slot 4 on PCI module 2  
PCI slot 5 on PCI module 2  
PCI slot 6 on PCI module 2  
PCI slot 7 on PCI module 2  
SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module 2  
SCSI bus 1 of SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module 2  
Ethernet Board 1 on PCI module 2  
Ethernet Board 2 on PCI module 2  
Power supply unit on PCI module 2  
SCSI enclosure 1  
11/0  
11/1  
11/2  
11/3  
11/4  
11/5  
11/6  
11/5  
11/5/0  
11/3  
11/6  
11/100  
41  
SCSI slot 1 on SCSI enclosure 1  
SCSI slot 2 on SCSI enclosure 1  
SCSI slot 3 on SCSI enclosure 1  
Electronics 1 on SCSI enclosure 1  
Power supply unit on SCSI enclosure 1  
41/1  
41/2  
41/3  
41/120  
41/100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-19  
Device name  
SCSI enclosure 2  
Device ID  
42  
SCSI slot 1 on SCSI enclosure 2  
SCSI slot 2 on SCSI enclosure 2  
SCSI slot 3 on SCSI enclosure 2  
Electronics 1 on SCSI enclosure 2  
Power supply unit on SCSI enclosure 2  
42/1  
42/2  
42/3  
42/120  
42/100  
The figure below shows the actual locations of the device names displayed on the NEC ESMPRO  
screen. In the case of the tower model, modules are mounted vertically instead of horizontally.  
PCI module1  
SCSI enclosure1 (SCSI 1 –  
SCSI 3 from left to right)  
PCI module2  
SCSI enclosure2 (SCSI 1 –  
SCSI 3 from left to right)  
CPU module1  
CPU module3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-20  
Supplement  
Note the followings when using NEC ESMPRO Agent.  
Maintenance-related Functions  
When you want to use maintenance-related functions of the NEC Express5800/ft series, contact  
your maintenance personnel.  
Change of Installation States of CPU and PCI Modules  
If you dynamically change the configuration of the CPU or PCI module in the relevant system  
during review of the server information by using the data viewer, the message prompting you to  
reconstruct the tree of the data viewer will appear. If you click the [Yes] button, the tree is  
reconstructed in the data viewer to reflect the change of the system configuration on the data viewer.  
Clicking the [No] button does not cause the tree to be reconstructed in the data viewer. If so, the  
information in the data viewer may be different from the current system information because the  
change of the system configuration is not reflected on the data viewer.  
Impact When Module Status Changes  
PCI modules, SCSI adapters, SCSI buses, and modules under the SCSI enclosure have impact on  
each other. For example, when the “Status” item of a module changes to “fault,” it may be caused  
by another module’s error. Therefore, you need to check the status of the other modules based on  
alert information.  
Status Color after Mounting a Hard Disk  
When creating a new mirror, the status of the hard disk and its upper component, SCSI enclosure,  
will continue to change frequently after you mount a hard disk until the mirror is completed. During  
this process, the status color may turn to abnormal, but when the mirror is created successfully, it  
will return normal.  
LAN Monitoring Report  
The LAN monitoring function defines the line status depending on the number of transmission  
packets and the number of packet errors within a certain period. Thus, the LAN monitoring function  
may report a line fault or high line load only in a temporary high line impedance state. If a normal  
state recovery is reported immediately, temporal high line impedance may have occurred thus there  
is not any problem.  
Community Authority  
Depending on your OS type or its version, settings for community, SNMP service’s security  
function, are not made, or default settings of authority are different  
To enable the remote shutdown and threshold change functions via NEC ESMPRO Manager, make  
settings of community and set its authority to "READ CREATE" or "READ WRITE."  
Temperature/Voltage/Fan Sensors Thresholds  
The thresholds of temperature/voltage/fan sensors cannot be displayed or modified. However,  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-21  
depending on the model, only the thresholds can be displayed in the data viewer of NEC ESMPRO  
Manager. NEC ESMPRO Manager performs monitoring by using the optimum thresholds specified  
to each model.  
Alert  
Some detail information of alerts displayed on the alert viewer appears as “Unknown” depending on  
alerts.  
Change Settings of File System Monitoring Function  
New settings in thresholds of monitoring interval and free space monitoring are not reflected  
immediately after they are changed. They are reflected at the next monitoring interval of monitoring  
service.  
Actions to Take When Temperature/Voltage Error Occurs on CPU/PCI Modules  
At the time when a temperature or voltage error occurs on CPU/PCI module, necessary actions will  
differ depending on their status as shown below. You can check the status of each module from the  
data viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager or ft server utility.  
Status  
Actions  
Duplex  
Other than duplex or empty  
Stop the failed CPU/PCI module.  
Shut down the system.  
TIPS:  
ꢀIf the status is “Empty,” the module is not mounted. Sensor monitoring is not conducted.  
ꢀIf disks are mounted on PCI modules, the status of both modules is “Simplex” while the  
disks are mirrored. Temperature or voltage error occurring during disk mirroring will  
result in the system to shut down.  
Shutdown Monitoring  
When performing shutdown monitoring, all shutdown processes are to be monitored. If there are  
any applications which use shutdown process that does not require restarting the OS or turning off  
the power, specify a longer timeout period, or turn off the monitoring.  
When [ft Server] Tree Appears on a Data Viewer in an Incorrect Manner  
If you perform a Data Viewer startup or tree rebuilding just after the system starts up or after the  
PCI module starts up/shuts down, the [Ft Server] tree side may not appear normally on the Data  
Viewer. In this case, wait for 5 minutes before retrying a Data Viewer startup.  
Information Displayed on a Data Viewer  
Some information of the devices cannot be acquired due to the OS specifications. These devices are  
displayed as “Unknown” on the Data Viewer of the NEC ESMPRO Manager. Also, accurate  
information may not be acquired due to the OS specifications. In such case, accurate information  
may not be displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-22  
Mirror Information of the SCSI Disk  
The “Mirror disk” displayed on the [Ft Server] tree of the Data Viewer is always in gray. Also,  
“Unknown” is always displayed on the “Status” field.  
Stopping the PCI Module by the ft server utility  
When you stop the PCI module on the primary side by the ft server utility, the ft server utility screen  
may become blur temporarily. However, it returns to a normal status after a few seconds when the  
pop-up screen is displayed on the ft server utility. This will not cause a problem for the ft server  
utility functions.  
About the display of a floppy disk drive  
- The information on [drive /dev/fd0] is displayed on a data viewer under [ESMMIB]-[I/O device].  
Because the floppy disk drive is not mounted in this equipment, this information should be  
ignored.  
- When a USB floppy disk drive is connected, the information on a floppy disk drive is not  
displayed on a data viewer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-23  
NEC ESMPRO Manager  
To monitor and manage a computer, on which NEC ESMPRO Agent is installed, with a  
management PC online, use NEC ESMPRO Manager that is bundled with the product.  
For detailed procedures of installation and setting, see online documents or NEC ESMPRO Online  
Help.  
TIPS: Online documents provide cautions and information for using NEC ESMPRO  
Manager. See NEC ESMPRO Manager User’s Guide in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
CD-ROM.  
Monitoring by Use of Data Viewer  
To monitor the state of the NEC Express5800/ft series on a management computer with installation  
of NEC ESMPRO Manager, the data viewer is used. If you click each of the modules and items to  
be checked sequentially on the tree view in the Windows Explorer format, the data viewer indicates  
their states on the right side of the screen.  
You can manage the status on a Web browser using Web component functions of NEC ESMPRO  
Manager. For details, see Help on Web Component.  
This section describes the tree structure and displayed screens in the data viewer.  
To make the data viewer indicate the state of each module and those of the components on it, select  
the server to be monitored from NEC ESMPRO Manager to start the data viewer (in the following  
description, the start procedure of the data viewer is omitted).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-24  
Monitoring CPU Module  
To monitor the CPU modules and the components on the CPU module, see the [CPU Module] tree.  
To see the information on the [CPU Module] tree, select the target CPU module from [CPU  
Module] in the [FTServer] tree.  
You can see the following information on the modules and the components on the CPU modules in  
the [CPU Module] tree.  
ꢀ General  
Allows the configuration and other information on the CPU modules to be viewed.  
ꢀ Maintenance  
Allows the start/stop, MTBF information clear, dump acquisition, and diagnosis of the CPU  
modules to be provided. See "Maintenance of NEC Express5800/ft series" described later for  
the start/stop and MTBF information clear of the CPU modules.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-25  
ꢀ Update  
Allows the device identification information of the CPU modules to be viewed and BIOS of the  
CPU modules to be updated. See "Maintenance of NEC Express5800/ft series" described later  
for the update of BIOS of the CPU modules. The detailed device identification information can  
be checked by selecting [ESMPRO MIB] tree→[Hardware] tree→[Field Replaceable Unit]  
tree.  
ꢀ CPU  
Allows the information of the CPU on the CPU modules to be viewed.  
ꢀ DIMM  
Allows the information of DIMM on the CPU modules to be viewed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-26  
Monitoring PCI Module  
To monitor the PCI modules and the components on the PCI modules, refer to the [PCI Module]  
tree. To see the information on the [PCI Module] tree, select the target PCI module from [PCI  
Module] in the [FTServer] tree.  
You can see the following information on the PCI modules and the components on the PCI modules  
of the [PCI Module] tree.  
(This section describes the general information screens of the PCI modules. The components on the  
PCI modules are described later.)  
ꢀ General  
Allows the configuration and other information of the PCI modules to be viewed.  
ꢀ Maintenance  
Allows the start/stop, MTBF information clear, and diagnosis of the PCI modules to be  
provided. See "Maintenance of NEC Express5800/ft series" described later for the start/stop  
and MTBF information clear of the CPU modules.  
ꢀ Update  
Allows the device identification information of the PCI modules to be viewed. The detailed  
device identification information can be checked by selecting [ESMPRO MIB]  
tree→[Hardware] tree→[Field Replaceable Unit] tree.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-27  
Monitoring PCI Slots and Devices on PCI Module  
To monitor the PCI slots and devices on the PCI modules, see the [PCI slot] tree. To see the  
information on the [PCI slot] tree, select [PCI Module]→[PCI module (containing PCI slot to be  
seen)]→[PCI slot] of the [FTServer] tree.  
You can see the following information on the PCI slot and the devices on the PCI slot in the [PCI  
slot] tree.  
ꢀ General  
Allows the PCI slot configuration information to be viewed.  
ꢀ Maintenance  
Allows a device on the PCI slot to be started. This function is not supported in the current  
version.  
ꢀ PCI Device – General  
Allows the information of devices on the PCI slot to be viewed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-28  
ꢀ PCI Device – Detailed information  
Allows the detailed information of a device on the PCI slot to be viewed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-29  
Monitoring SCSI Adapter on PCI Module  
To monitor the SCSI adapter on the PCI modules, see the [SCSI adapter] tree. To see the  
information on the [SCSI adapter] tree, select [PCI Module]→[PCI module (to which the SCSI  
adapter to be viewed is connected)]→[SCSI adapter] of the [FTServer] tree.  
You can see the following information of the SCSI adapter in the [SCSI adapter] tree.  
ꢀ General  
Allows the configuration and other information of the SCSI adapter to be viewed.  
ꢀ Maintenance  
Allows the MTBF information of the SCSI adapter to be viewed or cleared.  
See "Maintenance of NEC Express5800/ft series" described later for clearing the MTBF  
information of the SCSI adapter.  
ꢀ Update  
Allows the firmware of the SCSI adapter to be updated.  
However, this function is not supported in the current version.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-30  
Monitoring BMC on PCI Module  
To monitor the base management controller (BMC), controller for system management, on the PCI  
modules, see the [BMC] tree. To see the information on the [BMC] tree, select [PCI Module]→[PCI  
module (containing BMC to be seen)]→[BMC] of the [FTServer] tree.  
You can see the BMC F/W version and other information in the [BMC] tree.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-31  
Monitoring Ethernet Adapter on PCI Module  
To monitor the Ethernet adapter on the PCI modules, see the [Ethernet adapter] tree. To see the  
information on the [Ethernet adapter] tree, select [PCI Module]→[PCI module (connected with  
Ethernet adapter to be seen)]→[Ethernet adapter] of the [FTServer] tree. You can see the following  
information of the Ethernet adapter from the [Ethernet adapter] tree.  
ꢀ General  
Allows the configuration and other information of the Ethernet adapter to be viewed.  
ꢀ Detailed  
Allows the detailed statistic and other information of the Ethernet adapter to be viewed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-32  
ꢀ Maintenance  
Allows the MTBF information of the Ethernet adapter to be viewed or cleared. See  
"Maintenance of NEC Express5800/ft series" described later for clearing the MTBF information  
on the Ethernet adapter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-33  
Monitoring SCSI Enclosure  
To monitor the SCSI enclosure, see the [SCSI enclosure] tree. To see the information on the [SCSI  
enclosure] tree, select [SCSI enclosure] of the [FTServer] tree.  
You can see the following information of the SCSI enclosure from the [SCSI enclosure] tree.  
ꢀ General  
Allows the configuration and other information of the  
SCSI enclosure to be viewed.  
IMPORTANT: You need to be aware that PCI  
modules, SCSI adapters, SCSI buses, and modules  
under the SCSI enclosure have impact on each  
other. For details, see “Impact When Module  
Status Changes” in “supplement”.  
ꢀ Maintenance  
Allows the MTBF information of the SCSI adapter to be viewed or cleared.  
See "Maintenance of NEC Express5800/ft series" described later for clearing the MTBF  
information on the SCSI enclosure.  
ꢀ Update  
Allows the firmware of the SCSI enclosure to be updated.  
However, this function is not supported in the current version.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-34  
ꢀ Electronics – General  
Allows the configuration and other information of the SCSI enclosure electronics to be viewed.  
ꢀ Electronics – Maintenance  
Allows the MTBF information of the SCSI enclosure electronics to be viewed or cleared.  
See "Maintenance of NEC Express5800/ft series" described later for clearing the MTBF  
information on the SCSI electronics enclosure.  
ꢀ SCSI Slot – General  
Allows the configuration and other information of the SCSI slot to be viewed.  
IMPORTANT: You need to be aware of the status of hard disk during the mirror  
creation. For details, see “Status Color after Mounting a Hard Disk” in “Supplement”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-35  
ꢀ SCSI Slot – Maintenance  
Allows the MTBF information of the SCSI slot to be viewed or cleared.  
See "Maintenance of NEC Express5800/ft series" described later for clearing the MTBF  
information on the SCSI slot.  
Monitoring Mirror Disk  
To monitor the mirror disk components, see the [Mirror Disk] tree. To view information on [Mirror  
Disk] tree, select [Mirror Disk] under [FTServer] tree.  
You can see the redundancy status of the mirrors and the device IDs of the SCSI slots into which  
these hard disk components are connected.  
[Mirror Disk]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-36  
Maintenance of NEC Express5800/ft series  
NEC Express5800/ft series maintenance can be done in two ways; one is to use NEC ESMPRO  
Manager for remote maintenance and the other is to use the NEC ESMPRO Agent ft server utility  
on the NEC Express5800/ft series for local maintenance.  
TIPS: The following explains how to start NEC ESMPRO Agent ft server utility installed on  
NEC Express5800/ft series.  
1. Move to the location where NEC ESMPRO Agent is installed.  
If the installation destination is not specified, /opt/nec/esmpro_sa is the destination.  
In this description, /opt/nec/esmpro_sa is assumed as the installation destination.  
2. Move to the location where ft server utility is stored.  
cd bin  
3. Start the tool.  
./ESMftcutil  
The maintenance functions that can be executed from NEC ESMPRO include three types, those  
common to all components, those specific to particular components, and general system settings.  
The maintenance functions common to all components are operated in the same way basically (the  
operation procedure and typical examples of screen images are described below).  
The table below lists the maintenance functions common to all components.  
Diag-  
nosis  
MTBF  
clear  
F/W  
update  
Start  
Stop  
Component  
R
L
√
√
–
–
–
–
–
–
R
L
√
√
–
–
–
–
–
–
R
L
√
√
–
√
√
√
√
√
R
L
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
R
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
L
√
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CPU module  
PCI module  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
√
√
–
–
–
–
–
–
√
√
–
–
–
–
–
–
√
√
–
√
√
√
√
√
PCI slot  
Ethernet adapter  
SCSI adapter  
SCSI enclosure  
SCSI electronics  
SCSI slot  
R:  
Remote. Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO  
Manager  
L:  
√:  
–:  
Local. Executable on local server by using ft server utility  
Support  
Not support  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-37  
The table below shows the component-specific maintenance functions executable from NEC  
ESMPRO.  
Dump acquisition  
during system  
operation  
Dump  
acquisition  
Board switch  
Component  
R
L
R
L
R
L
CPU module  
–
–
–
–
√
√
R:  
Remote. Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO  
Manager  
L:  
√:  
–:  
Local. Executable on local server by using ft server utility  
Support  
Not support  
BMC firmware update  
Component  
R
L
BMC  
–
√
R:  
Remote. Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO  
Manager  
L:  
√:  
–:  
Local. Executable on local server by using ft server utility  
Support  
Not support  
The table below shows the support of the whole system setup functions.  
Quick dump  
Auto firmware update  
Auto module start  
Component  
R
L
R
L
R
L
Whole system  
–
–
–
√
√
√
R:  
Remote. Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO  
Manager  
L:  
√:  
–:  
Local. Executable on local server by using ft server utility  
Support  
Not support  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-38  
Start and Stop of Components  
To start or stop a component with NEC ESMPRO Manager, use the [Maintenance] tree of the  
component in the [FTServer] tree of the data viewer. Open the tree of the component to be started or  
stopped and select the [Maintenance] tree.  
To start or stop a component with the ft server utility, use the utility screen of the component.  
The table below shows the potential cases in which a component is to be started or stopped.  
Compo-  
nent  
Start  
Remote  
Stop  
Remote  
Local  
Local  
CPU  
Module  
When the cause of  
down is reviewed  
and the system is  
restarted in module  
down state.  
When the cause of  
down is reviewed  
and the system is  
restarted in module  
down state.  
When system is  
stopped forcibly  
due to replacement due to replacement  
or malfunction of  
module.  
When system is  
stopped forcibly  
or malfunction of  
module.  
Executable in the  
following module  
state:  
Executable in any of  
the following module  
states (this can be  
viewed on manager  
screen):  
Executable in the  
following module  
state:  
Executable in the  
following module  
state (this can be  
viewed on manager  
screen):  
•
Only the green  
LED is on and in  
redundant  
•
Only the red  
LED is on  
•
•
•
•
Removed  
Broken  
Shot  
Firmware  
Update Complete  
Diagnostics  
Passed  
•
Duplex  
configuration  
state  
Only the red LED is  
on when the module  
is in one of the  
The both green  
following states:  
LEDs are on when  
the module is in the  
following state:  
•
•
•
•
Removed  
Broken  
Shot  
Firmware  
Update Complete  
Diagnostics  
Passed  
•
•
Duplex  
•
PCI Module Same as above  
Same as above  
Same as above  
Same as above  
Remote: Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager  
Local:  
–:  
Executable on local server by using ft server utility  
Not support  
IMPORTANT: PCI modules, SCSI adapters, SCSI buses, and modules under the SCSI  
enclosure have impact on each other. You need to be aware of this, for example, when you  
replace a PCI module. For details, see “Impact When Module Status Changes” in  
“supplement”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-39  
Procedure in NEC ESMPRO Manager  
Start  
52. Select the target component in the [FTServer] tree.  
53. Check the current state with the "Status" display on the target component screen.  
54. Click the [Bring Up] button in the [Maintenance] screen for the target component.  
A certain time is required for the start.  
The start result can be confirmed by "State" on the target component screen. The result of  
the start operation is reported by the NEC Express5800/ft series as an alert.  
Stop  
Perform the procedure below before replacing a component.  
55. Select the target component in the [FTServer] tree.  
56. Check the current state with the "State" display on the target component screen.  
57. Click the [Bring Down] button in the [Maintenance] screen for the target component.  
A certain time is required for the stop.  
The stop result can be confirmed by "State" on the target component screen. The result of  
the stop operation is reported by the NEC Express5800/ft series as an alert.  
Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager 1  
[Maintenance] screen of PCI module  
[PCI Module] – [Maintenance]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-40  
Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager 2  
[Maintenance] screen of CPU module  
[CPU Module] – [Maintenance]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-41  
Procedure in the ft server utility  
Start  
58. Select the target component from the main window of the ft server utility.  
The screen of the target component appears.  
59. Check the current state of the target component with the LEDs.  
60. Click the [Up] button of the target component.  
A certain time is required for the start.  
The start result can be confirmed by the LEDs on the target component. The result of the  
start operation is registered in the syslog.  
Stop  
Stop before replacing components.  
61. Select the target component from the main window of the ft server utility.  
The screen of the target component appears.  
62. Check the current state of the target component with the LEDs.  
63. Click the [Down] button of the target component.  
A certain time is required for the start.  
The start result can be confirmed by the LEDs on the target component. The result of the  
start operation is registered in the syslog.  
Sample screen of ft server utility  
[CPU] module screen  
Main window  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-42  
Check and Clear of MTBF Information  
The MTBF information of a component can be viewed or cleared (initialized).  
NEC Express5800/ft series manages the MTBF (mean time between failure) of each component. If  
a fault occurs in a component, the NEC Express5800/ft series calculates the MTBF of the  
component again. If the calculated value is lower than the pre-defined threshold, the NEC  
Express5800/ft series disables the component to be used.  
Contact your maintenance personnel if such a symptom as above occurs.  
IMPORTANT: A disabled component with the MTBF lower than the threshold can be  
forcibly enabled by clearing the MTBF. However, contact your maintenance personnel for  
the forced use of such a component.  
To clear the MTBF information of a component with NEC ESMPRO Manager, use the  
[Maintenance] tree of the component of the [FTServer] tree of the data viewer. Open the tree of the  
component whose MTBF information is to be cleared and select the [Maintenance] tree.  
To clear the MTBF information of a component with the ft server utility, use the utility screen of the  
component. The table below shows the potential cases in which the MTBF information of a  
component is to be cleared. Contact your maintenance personnel for clearing MTBF information.  
Component  
MTBF clear  
Remote  
Local  
CPU Module  
To start the module forcibly after  
To start the module forcibly after replacing  
replacing a module or if MTBF became a module or if MTBF became lower than  
lower than the threshold due to  
malfunction and disabled the module.  
the threshold due to malfunction and  
disabled the module.  
Executable in the following module  
state (this can be viewed on manager  
screen):  
Executable in the following module state:  
•
Only the red LED is on and the event  
indicating that MTBF is lower than the  
threshold is registered in the event log.  
•
Broken  
MTBF is lower than the threshold.  
PCI Module  
Same as above  
Same as above  
Ethernet  
Adapter  
To start the module/component forcibly To start the module/component forcibly  
after replacing a module or if MTBF  
became lower than the threshold due  
to malfunction and disabled the  
module/component.  
after replacing a module or if MTBF  
became lower than the threshold due to  
malfunction and disabled the  
module/component.  
Executable in the following module  
state (this can be viewed on manager  
screen):  
Executable in the following module state  
(this can be viewed on manager screen):  
•
Only the red LED is on and the event  
indicating that MTBF is lower than the  
threshold is registered in the event log.  
Broken  
MTBF is lower than the threshold.  
You can clear MTBF information by  
unplugging and plugging the live wire  
of the PCI module.  
You can clear MTBF information by  
unplugging and plugging the live wire of  
the PCI module.  
SCSI Adapter Same as above  
Same as above  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-43  
Component  
MTBF clear  
Remote  
Local  
SCSI  
To start the module/component forcibly To start the module/component forcibly  
Enclosure  
after replacing a module or if MTBF  
became lower than the threshold due  
to malfunction and disabled the  
module/component.  
after replacing a module or if MTBF  
became lower than the threshold due to  
malfunction and disabled the  
module/component.  
Executable in the following module  
state (this can be viewed on manager  
screen):  
Executable in the following module state  
(this can be viewed on manager screen):  
Only the red LED is on and the event  
indicating that MTBF is lower than the  
threshold is registered in the event log.  
Broken  
MTBF is lower than the threshold.  
SCSI  
Same as above  
Same as above  
Electronics  
SCSI Slot  
Same as above  
Same as above  
Remote: Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager  
Local: Executable on local server by using ft server utility  
–: Not support  
Procedure in NEC ESMPRO Manager  
Perform the procedure below before replacement of a component.  
64. Select the target component in the [FTServer] tree.  
65. Check the current state with the "State" display on the target component screen.  
66. Click the [Clear] button in the [MTBF Clear] of the target component.  
The MTBF clearing result can be confirmed by "State" on the target component screen.  
The result of the MTBF clearing operation is reported by the NEC Express5800/ft series  
as an alert.  
67. Start the component.  
Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager  
[Maintenance] screen of SCSI enclosure  
[SCSI Enclosure] – [Maintenance]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-44  
Procedure in the ft server utility  
Perform the procedure below before replacement of a component.  
68. Select the target component from the main window of the ft server utility.  
The screen of the target component appears.  
69. Check the current state of the target component with the LEDs.  
70. Click the [Clear] button in [MTBF Clear] of the target component.  
The MTBF clearing result can be confirmed by the LEDs on the target component. The  
result of the MTBF clearing operation is registered in the syslog.  
71. Start the component.  
Sample screen of ft server utility  
Main window  
[PCI module] screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-45  
Firmware Update  
NEC Express5800/ft series can update firmware (including BIOS) if some hardware components  
operate in the online state (in which the system continues the operation but the component trying to  
update firmware or BIOS is stopped).  
Updating firmware can be performed from the ft server utility.  
To update the firmware of a component, the firmware image file of the firmware for update must  
previously be stored in the managed server. On the firmware update screen, specify the path to the  
firmware image file for update.  
The table below shows the potential cases in which the firmware of a component is to be updated.  
Firmware update  
Component  
Remote  
Local  
CPU Module  
When BIOS must be updated to new  
one.  
Executable in the following module  
state:  
•
Only the red LED lit red is on  
Only the red LED is on when the  
module is in one of the following states:  
–
•
•
•
Removed  
Broken or forced stop  
No fault found by diagnosis  
(Firmware Update Complete)  
To update the module under operation,  
bring down the module before the  
update.  
Remote: Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager  
Local: Executable on local server by using ft server utility  
–: Not support  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-46  
Procedure in the ft server utility  
72. Enable “Auto module start” and “Auto firmware update”.  
See “Setup of System Operation” in this chapter for the procedure to enable.  
73. Store the image data of the firmware for update in the NEC Express5800/ft series.  
Save it in the /etc directory under the name “BIOS.ROM”.  
74. On the main window of the ft server utility, select the target component.  
The screen of the target component appears.  
75. Check the current state of the target component with the LEDs. If the component is  
running, stop the component.  
76. Click [Update] on [Firmware].  
The [Firmware Update] screen appears.  
77. Select [File Path Update] and then click [Execute].  
The firmware update will be performed. After the firmware update has completed, the  
target component automatically starts and the other stops.  
IMPORTANT:  
If “Auto firmware update” is disabled, the target component will not start and the  
firmware update will not complete. In such case, perform the firmware update again  
after enabling “Auto firmware update”.  
78. The other component will start automatically and the firmware will be updated  
automatically.  
IMPORTANT:  
If “Auto module start” is disabled, the target component will not start automatically. In  
such case, start the component manually. The firmware will be updated automatically.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-47  
Sample screen of ft server utility  
Main window  
[CPU module] screen  
[Firmware Update] screen  
Even if you do not have the image data of firmware for update, the firmware can be copied from the  
other module.  
By starting the module, the firmware will be updated automatically. However, when the [Auto  
firmware update] property is disabled, follow the steps below to update the firmware:  
1. Start the system using the module of the firmware copy source.  
See the current status by the “Status” indication on the target component screen of the copy  
destination and confirm that it is stopped.  
2. On the [Update] screen of the target component, click [Firmware update].  
3. When a firmware updating dialog appears, check [Copy firmware from Online module to  
Offline one.] and execute it.  
Firmware is updated by copying the firmware on the online side to the offline side.  
4. Start the stopped module.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-48  
Dump Collection  
To collect the dump file with NEC ESMPRO Manager, use [CPU Module] →[Maintenance] tree in  
the data viewer.  
To collect the dump with the ft server utility, use the utility screen of the component.  
IMPORTANT: Acquire the dump only for the examination of a fault.  
The dump can be collected in two ways. In each way, the dump file is collected with the same path  
and file name "%SystemDrive%\NECDump\MEMORY.DMP" as the dump file of the OS standard.  
ꢀ Collecting dump of inactive module  
The dump is acquired from the inactive CPU module (due to the occurrence of a fault or  
forced stop).  
IMPORTANT: The dump cannot be acquired from the inactive CPU module (due  
to the occurrence of a fault or forced stop) by using ft server utility. The dump is  
output automatically from the CPU module when a fault or forced stop occurs.  
ꢀ Collecting dump under system operation  
Either of the CPU modules is entered into the offline state and the dump is collected  
during system operation. After the acquisition, the CPU module is returned to the online  
state again. This can be done only in the duplex system.  
The table below shows the potential cases in which the dump is acquired.  
Saving dump of component under  
Saving dump of stopped module  
system operation  
Remote  
Component  
Remote Local  
Local  
CPU Module  
When a fault or  
When a fault or  
malfunction occurs malfunction occurs in  
in the system.  
Save the dump if  
requested by  
the system.  
Save the dump if  
requested by  
maintenance  
maintenance  
personnel.  
personnel  
Executable in the  
following module  
state (this can be  
viewed on manager  
screen):  
Executable in the  
following module  
state:  
• When only the  
green LED is on and  
the module is in  
redundant  
–
–
•
Duplex  
configuration state  
Only the green LED is  
on when the module is  
in the following state:  
• Duplex  
Remote: Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager  
Local:  
Executable on local server by using ft server utility  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-49  
–:  
Not support  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-50  
Procedure in NEC ESMPRO Manager  
The [Dump] button of NEC ESMPRO Manager performs the function of "saving dump during  
system operation."  
79. Select [CPU Module] in the [FTServer] tree.  
80. Check the current state with the "State" display on the target component screen.  
81. Click the [Dump] button in the [Maintenance] screen for the target component.  
A certain time is required for the dump saving.  
The dump is stored as %SystemDrive%\NECDump\MEMORY.DMP on the managed  
server.  
The result of the dump saving is reported by the NEC Express5800/ft series as an alert.  
Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager  
[Maintenance] screen of CPU module  
[CPU Module] – [Maintenance]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-51  
Procedure in the ft server utility  
82. On the main window of the ft server utility, select the target component.  
The screen of the target component appears.  
83. Check the current status of the target CPU module with the LEDs.  
84. Select the dump acquisition method on [Dump] of the CPU module screen, and click  
[Execute].  
A certain time is required for the dump acquisition. The dump is stored to the system  
defined location on the server.  
The result of the dump acquisition can be registered in the syslog.  
85. Start the component.  
Sample screen of ft server utility  
[CPU] module screen  
Main window  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-52  
Setup of System Operation  
The following properties can be set as the operation setup of the whole system.  
ꢀ Quick dump  
If this property is enabled (by checking "Enable" on the setup screen), the dump is  
acquired in parallel with the system startup if a fault occurs in the system. If this property  
is disabled, the dump is acquired by the dump function normally provided by OS.  
The initial setup value is "Enable." This value cannot be changed.  
ꢀ Auto firmware update  
If a new CPU module containing BIOS different from that of the existing CPU module in  
version with this property being enabled (by checking "Enable" on the setup screen), the  
BIOS of the new CPU module is updated to the BIOS of the existing CPU module to  
match with each other. If this property is disabled, the BIOS of the new CPU module is  
not update automatically.  
The initial setup value is "Enable."  
ꢀ Auto module start  
If this property is enabled (by checking "Enable" on the setup screen), the CPU or PCI  
module newly inserted is automatically started to be operable. If this property is disabled,  
the module is not started automatically.  
The initial setup value is "Enable."  
The system operation can be set on [FTServer] tree→[General] screen of the ft server utility.  
The table below shows the potential cases in which the system operation setup is changed. Contact  
your maintenance personnel for the change of the system operation setup. Setting change will take  
effect after system reboot. However, the utility does not indicate that reboot is required.  
Quick dump  
Remote Local  
Auto firmware update  
Remote Local  
Auto module start  
Remote Local  
Componen  
t
Whole  
system  
Executable if  
the system is  
operating.  
Executable if the  
system is  
operating.  
Executable if the  
system is  
operating.  
When dump is  
acquired by  
using the dump  
function  
When firmware is  
updated manually  
at insertion of  
When firmware is  
updated manually  
at insertion of new  
CPU/PCI module  
–
–
–
new CPU module  
normally  
installed in OS  
at occurrence of  
system fault.  
Remote: Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager  
Local:  
–:  
Executable on local server by using ft server utility  
Not support  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-53  
Configure the system settings using the ft server utility in the following procedure. The system  
cannot be configured using the NEC ESMPRO Manager.  
86. Select [General] on the main window of the ft server utility.  
The [General] window appears.  
87. Check the property to modify on the [General] window (or cancel the check).  
88. Click [Execute].  
Sample screen of ft  
server utility  
[CPU] module screen  
Main window  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-54  
BMC Firmware Update  
The firmware of the BMC on the PCI module can be updated.  
The base management controller (BMC) is the processor exclusively used for monitoring the  
system’s operating environment faults and controlling of the system.  
The BMC firmware can be updated by using the BMC firmware update utility.  
Both NEC ESMPRO Manager and the ft server utility can start the BMC firmware update utility.  
To update the BMC firmware, the firmware image file must be updated on the managed server in  
advance. On the BMC firmware update screen, specify the path of the image file of the firmware to  
be updated.  
IMPORTANT:  
By default, the BMC firmware update utility refers the following path. It is recommended to  
create a data directory under /usr/bmcfwupd in advance, and store the firmware image file in  
this directory when updating the firmware.  
/usr/bmcfwupd/data  
The table below shows the potential cases in which the BMC firmware is to be updated.  
IMPORTANT: Contact your maintenance personnel for the update of the BMC firmware.  
BMC firmware update  
Component  
Remote  
Local  
BMC  
When an update to new firmware is  
required.  
Executable in the following module state  
•
Only the green LEDs on all PCI  
modules are on  
–
Executable in the following state when only  
the green LEDs on all PCI modules are on:  
•
Duplex  
Remote: Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager  
Local:  
–:  
Executable on local server by using ft server utility  
Not support  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-55  
Procedure of Update from the ft server utility  
Update the firmware in the procedure as follows.  
89. Select [Firmware] on the main window of the ft  
server utility.  
The [Firmware] dialog box appears.  
90. Click [Update].  
The [BMC FW update Tool] screen appears.  
91. Select [BMC FW update Command]  
menu, and press Enter.  
The firmware will be updated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-56  
Changing Update Data Storage Destination  
Change the storage destination by using the ft server utility in the procedure below.  
92. Select [Firmware] on the main window of the ft server  
utility.  
The [Firmware] dialog box appears.  
93. Click [Update].  
The [BMC FW update Tool] screen  
appears.  
94. Select [BMC FW update Property  
Setting] menu, and then press enter.  
The [BMC FW update Daemon  
Property Setting] screen appears.  
95. Enter the storage destination in [Data  
File Path], and then click [Data save  
and Exit].  
If you click [Cancel and Exit], the  
property setting will be finished with  
the updated data canceled.  
The confirmation message for the  
storage is displayed.  
96. Press Y to store. Press N not to store.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-57  
NEC MWA ∼ MANAGEMENT WORKSTATION APPLICATION ∼  
NEC MWA is an application that enables the remote management of the server through a  
management PC over the network. (A management PC is a computer running NEC ESMPRO  
Manager.)  
Refer to “MWA First Step Guide” in the following directory of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
CD-ROM for details of its functions and operation.  
CD-ROM drive: \mwa\doc\mwa_fsg.pdf  
TIPS: How to install MWA is described in online documents. See “MWA Installation  
Guide” for details.  
IMPORTANT: If you set up NEC MWA using Console Redirection (via WAN or direct),  
select [System Hardware] → [Console Redirection] → [Serial Port Address] and set  
[Onboard COM B] on the BIOS setup utility. For details, see Chapter 4 “SYSTEM BIOS ~  
SETUP ~”.  
Servers to be remotely managed by MWA  
The server with RomPilot or BMC can be managed by MWA.  
This product has both RomPilot and BMC (IPMI1.0).  
PRECAUTIONS:  
“MWA First Step Guide” is common to all the managed servers. The followings are notes  
and restrictions for this product.  
ꢀThe Console Redirection feature with WAN or direct connection cannot be used when the  
server is operated remotely from the other management PC by using the RomPilot  
feature via LAN. To use Console Redirection with WAN or direct connection, set  
“RomPilot Support” in “Advanced” menu of BIOS setup utility to “Disabled”. See  
Chapter 4 “SYSTEM BIOS ~SETUP~” for details.  
ꢀESCD information is not collected by MWA. If you attempt to collect it from MWA,  
“ESCD data read error server report: Plug and Play call error” is generated.  
ꢀNO MWAAgent is available on this product. Use the “BMC configuration tool” to  
configure this product on Windows.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-58  
Remote Management Configuration for the Server without Console  
If the main unit does not have a console such as keyboard, you can operate tools on the server  
remotely using MWA’s remote console functions and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER’s consoleless  
functions.  
There are two ways of remote console connection depending on the condition of connection  
between the management PC and the main unit:  
ꢀ Connect from the management PC linked to the main unit through LAN.  
ꢀ Connect from the management PC directly linked (through Serial port B) to the main unit.  
Connect from the Management PC Linked through LAN  
On the management PC that is linked through LAN, perform the steps below:  
97. Start the management PC where MWA is installed. From the Start menu, select [Program]  
→ [NEC MWA] → [MWA].  
When MWA starts, the initial screen “Remote Control Manager” will appear.  
98. Insert a formatted 1.44MB floppy disk into the drive.  
99. From MWA’s [File] menu, select [Configuration] command to open [Configuration]  
dialog box.  
100. Select [New] to display the [Select a model] dialog box.  
101. Check [Write to FD] and select an applicable model to open [Configuration for ft Series]  
dialog box.  
Ex) The model name is printed on the front cover like “NEC Express5800/320Lb,” or  
“NEC Express5800/320Lb-R.”  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-59  
102. [Configuration for ft Series] dialog box, specify/register configuration information  
including the names of computers to be managed, and then write the information to FD as  
the following filename:  
<Filename>  
CSL_LESS.CFG  
The setting items of the server are as follows:  
Computer Name (The managed server name. Arbitrary)  
IP address  
Subnet mask  
Default gateway  
Primary contact (Management PC’s IP address)  
103. Right-clicking the server name to open the pop-up menu, from which select [Property]  
command to open [Property] dialog box.  
104. When the [Property] dialog box appears: specify the items as follows:  
<[ID] page>  
Connection mode: LAN  
<[Alert notification] page>  
Uncheck [Use Default  
Settings] and check [Reset] of  
[Activate].  
105. Right-clicking the server  
name to open the pop-up  
menu and select [Open  
Remote Console] to open  
[MWA Remote Console].  
106. Select the [Action at Remote Console Connect] command from the popup menu displayed  
by right-clicking the server window to display the [Action at Remote Console Connect]  
dialog box. Then select [Go MWA mode].  
107. Insert NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the drive of the computer to be managed  
and insert floppy disk storing the configuration information (CSL_LESS.CFG) into the  
FDD drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-60  
108. Hook up the management PC to LAN.  
109. Power off and on the main unit to reboot the system.  
After one reboot, the main menu will appear on the management PC’s screen, on which  
you can perform hardware setup and run utilities.  
TIPS: If the configuration information (CSL_LESS.CFG) in the FD has already  
been loaded, the main menu will appear without a reboot.  
110. When the main menu appears on the management PC’s screen, eject the floppy disk.  
111. If you use other tools, exit NEC EXPRESSBUILDER and power on/off the main unit.  
IMPORTANT: After completing the procedure for remote console connection,  
uncheck [Reset] of [Activate] in [Property] dialog box.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-61  
Connect from the Management PC Directly Linked (through Serial port B)  
On the management PC that is linked directly to Serial port B of the main unit, perform the steps  
below:  
112. Start the management PC where MWA is installed. From the Start menu, select [Program]  
→ [NEC MWA] → [MWA].  
When MWA starts, the initial screen “Remote Control Manager” will appear.  
113. Select [Environment] – [Direct Connection Setting] from the [File] menu of NEC MWA  
to display the [Direct Connection] dialog box. Configure the following settings:  
<Direct Connection>  
Port No.:  
COM port on the management PC to be connected  
Baud Rate: 19200  
Flow Control: None  
114. From MWA’s [File] menu, select [Configuration] command to open [Configuration]  
dialog box.  
115. Select [New] to display [Select a model] dialog box.  
116. Check [Write to FD] and select an applicable model to open [Configuration for ft Series]  
dialog box.  
Ex)  
The model name is printed on the front cover like “NEC Express5800/320Lb,”  
or “NEC Express5800/320Lb-R.”  
117. [Configuration for ft Series] dialog box, specify/register configuration information  
including the names of computers to be managed, and then write the information to FD as  
the following filename:  
<Filename>  
CSL_LESS.CFG  
118. Right-clicking the server name to open the pop-up menu and select [Property] command  
to open [Property] dialog box.  
119. When [Property] dialog box appears: specify the items as follows:  
<[ID] page>  
Connection mode: COM  
COM:  
Direct (cross cable)  
120. Right-clicking the server name to open the pop-up menu and select [Open Remote  
Console] to open [MWA Remote Console].  
After checking to see if the server window is open on [MWA Remote Console], click the  
[Connect] button.  
121. Hook up the management PC directly to Serial port B of the computer to be managed.  
122. Insert NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the drive of the managed computer and  
insert the floppy disk storing the configuration information (CSL_LESS.CFG) into the  
FDD drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-62  
123. Power off and on the main unit to reboot the system.  
After one reboot, the main menu will appear on the management PC’s screen, on which  
you can perform hardware setup and run utilities.  
TIPS: If the configuration information (CSL_LESS.CFG) in the FD has already  
been loaded, the main menu will appear without a reboot.  
124. If you use other tools, exit NEC EXPRESSBUILDER and power on/off the main unit.  
IMPORTANT: After completing the procedure for remote console connection,  
click [Disconnect] on the [MWA Remote Console] window.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-63  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
Maintenance  
This chapter describes the daily maintenance of NEC Express5800/ft series and precautions when  
relocating or storing the server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-2  
DAILY MAINTENANCE  
To use your NEC Express5800/ft series in best condition, check and maintain regularly as described  
below. If an error is found on your NEC Express5800/ft series, consult your sales agent.  
Checking Alert  
Monitor the failure occurrence by NEC ESMPRO during the system operation.  
Always check whether any alert is reported to NEC ESMPRO Manager on the management PC.  
Check whether any alert is reported on the Operation Window, Data Viewer, or Alert Viewer of  
NEC ESMPRO Manager.  
Viewers of NEC ESMPRO  
Operation Window  
Alert Viewer  
Data Viewer  
Checking STATUS LEDs and LCD Display  
Check the LED indication on the front of the NEC Express5800/ft series, on hard disks installed in  
3.5-inch device bay, or on LCD display when the server is powered on or powered off by the shut  
down operation. The functions and indications of LEDs are described in Chapter 2. If any indication  
that shows an error, contact your sales agent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-3  
Making Backup Copies  
NEC recommends you make backup copies of your valuable data stored in hard disks of the server  
on a regular basis. For backup storage devices suitable for the server and backup tools, consult with  
your sales agent.  
When you have changed the hardware configuration or BIOS configuration, select "System  
Information Management" and then "Save" of the Off-line Maintenance Utility to make a backup  
copy of the system information (See the separate volume of User’s Guide (Setup)).  
Cleaning  
Clean the server on a regular basis to keep the server in a good shape.  
WARNING  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow  
these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury. See  
PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY in Chapter 1.  
• Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.  
• Do not look into the CD-ROM drive.  
• Disconnect the power plug before cleaning the server.  
Cleaning the NEC Express5800/ft series  
For daily cleaning, wipe the external surfaces of the server with a dry soft cloth. Follow the  
procedure below if stains remain on the surfaces:  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀTo avoid altering the material and color of the server, do not use volatile solvents such as  
thinner or benzene to clean the server.  
ꢀThe power receptacle, the cables, the connectors on the rear panel of server, and the inside  
of the server must be kept dry. Do not moisten them with water.  
125. Make sure that the server is powered off.  
126. Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet.  
127. Wipe off dust from the power cord plug with a dry cloth.  
128. Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or warm water, and squeeze  
it firmly.  
129. Rub off stains on the server with the cloth prepared in Step 4.  
130. Soak a soft cloth in water, squeeze it firmly and wipe the server with it once again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-4  
131. Wipe the server with a dry cloth.  
132. Wipe off dust from the fan exhaust opening on the rear of the server with a dry cloth.  
Cleaning the Keyboard and Mouse  
IMPORTANT: A keyboard and a mouse use USB interface. You do not need to power off  
the server when connecting or disconnecting them.  
Disconnect the keyboard from the server while the devices in the system (the server and the  
peripheral devices) remain turned on. Wipe the keyboard surface with a dry cloth. Then connect the  
keyboard to the server.  
The mouse operation depends on the degree of smoothness of the internal ball rotation. To keep the  
mouse ball clean, use the mouse in a place with little dust. Follow the steps below to clean the  
mouse regularly:  
133. Disconnect the mouse from the USB hub of the keyboard while the server remains  
powered on.  
134. Turn the mouse upside down, and rotate the  
mouse ball cover counterclockwise to remove it.  
Take out the ball from the mouse.  
Mouse  
Mouse ball  
135. Wipe the mouse ball with a dry soft cloth.  
If stains remain, use a soft cloth to wipe them off.  
Soak the soft cloth in neutral detergent that is  
diluted with water or warm water, and squeeze it  
firmly,  
Mouse cover  
136. Wipe three small rollers inside the mouse with  
Bottom  
cotton swab.  
Use the cotton swab soaked with alcohol if stains  
remain.  
137. Put the mouse ball back into the mouse.  
If the mouse or rollers are wet in steps 3 and 4, put  
it back after fully dried.  
138. Place the mouse ball cover, and rotate it clockwise  
until it is locked.  
Rollers  
139. Connect the mouse to the server (to the USB hub  
of the keyboard).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-5  
Cleaning the Floppy Disk Drive  
A read/write error may occur due to stains on the read/write head of the floppy disk drive.  
Use the cleaner dedicated for floppy disk drive to clean the read/write head. It is recommended to  
clean the head on regular basis.  
Cleaning CD-ROM  
A dusty CD-ROM or dust-accumulated tray causes the device to fail to read data correctly.  
Follow the procedure below to clean the tray and CD-ROM regularly:  
140. Make sure that the server is powered (the POWER LED is lit).  
141. Press the Eject button on the front of the CD-ROM drive.  
The tray comes out.  
142. Hold the CD-ROM lightly and take it out from the tray.  
IMPORTANT: Do not touch the signal side of the CD-ROM with your hand.  
143. Wipe the tray with a dry soft cloth.  
IMPORTANT: Do not wipe the lens of the CD-ROM drive. Doing so may damage  
the lens and may cause a malfunction of the drive.  
144. Gently push on the tray front to close the tray.  
145. Wipe the signal side of the CD-ROM with a dry soft cloth.  
IMPORTANT: Wipe CD-ROMs from the center to the outside. Use only  
CD-ROM cleaner if necessary. Cleaning a CD-ROM with record spray/cleaner,  
benzene, or thinner causes damage to the CD-ROM contents. At worst, inserting the  
CD-ROM into the server may cause failure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-6  
Cleaning Tape Drive  
Dirt on the tape head may be a cause of unsuccessful backup and damage to tape cartridge. Clean  
the tape head regularly using a cleaning tape. For procedure and interval of cleaning as well as  
lifetime of a tape cartridge to use, see instructions included with the tape drive.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-7  
SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS  
The System Diagnostics runs several tests on the server.  
Select [Tools] → [System Diagnostics] in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER to diagnose the server.  
Test Items  
The following items are tested in system diagnostics.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Memory  
CPU cache memory  
Hard disk used as a system  
IMPORTANT: When executing the system diagnostics, make sure to remove the LAN cable.  
Executing the system diagnostics with the LAN cable connected, the network may be  
influenced.  
TIPS: On checking the hard disk, no data is written into the disk.  
Startup and Exit of System Diagnosis  
Procedures to start the diagnostic program are as follows:  
146. Shutdown the OS, and power off the server. Then, unplug the power cord.  
147. Disconnect all the LAN cables from the server.  
148. Plug the power cord and power on the server.  
149. Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to reboot the server.  
The following menu appears when the server is started using the NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER.  
150. Select [Tools].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-8  
System bar  
Title bar  
151. Select [System Diagnostics].  
The system diagnosis starts and will be  
completed in approximately three  
minutes.  
CURSOR: Select Window ENTER: View Window P: Log Out Q: Quit  
Test window  
Target scope  
When the diagnosis is completed, the  
following appears on the screen of the  
display unit.  
System bar: Shows information including time of progress during the diagnostics. Upon  
completion of the diagnostics, descriptions on key operations to navigate  
the window are shown.  
Title bar:  
Shows items for diagnosis. If an error is detected, the bar is indicated in  
red.  
Test window: Shows the progress or result of diagnostics.  
Target scope: A cursor to select the test window. Use the cursor keys on the keyboard to  
move it to another test window. (Move the target scope to a desired  
window and press Enter. Now you can view detailed information on the  
selected window. To return to the previous window, press Enter once  
again.) Some system configurations do not display the target scope but  
change the color of test window’s frame.  
If an error is detected during the system diagnostics, the title bar turns in red, and error  
information is displayed in red characters. Note down the error message and contact your  
sales agent.  
152. Press Q and select [Reboot] from the menu.  
The server restarts and the system is started from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
153. Exit the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, and remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.  
154. Power off the server and unplug the power cord from the receptacle.  
155. Reconnect all the LAN cables to the server.  
156. Plug the power cord.  
This completes the system diagnostics.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-9  
OFF-LINE MAINTENANCE UTILITY  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is an OS-independent maintenance program. When you are unable  
to start the OS-dependent NEC ESMPRO to troubleshoot a problem, the Off-line Maintenance  
Utility can be used.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀThe Off-line Maintenance Utility is intended for use of your sales agent. The NEC  
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and the Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD you  
have created contain a file that describes operation of the utility, but do not attempt to use  
the utility by yourself. Contact your sales agent and follow instructions.  
ꢀStarting the Off-line Maintenance Utility disables any access from a client to the server.  
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility may be started in the following ways.  
NEC Express5800/ft series does not support the feature to start the Off-line Maintenance Utility  
from the maintenance partition.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
From the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM  
Set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and reboot the system.  
After the menu is displayed on the screen, select [Tools] → [Off-line Maintenance Utility].  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the CD-ROM.  
From the floppy disk  
Set the Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD in the floppy disk drive and reboot the  
system. The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the boot disk. The Off-line  
Maintenance Utility Bootable FD is created by selecting [Tools] → [Create Support FD]  
on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.  
Features of Off-line Maintenance Utility  
The Off-line Maintenance Utility provides the following features.  
ꢀ IPMI Information Viewer  
Provides the functions to view the system event log (SEL), sensor data record (SDR), and  
field replaceable unit (FRU) in IPMI (Intelligent Platform Management Interface) and to  
make a backup copy of them.  
Using this feature, you can find system errors and events to determine a maintenance part.  
ꢀ BIOS Setup Viewer  
Provides the functions to export the current configuration data defined with the SETUP utility  
to a text file.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-10  
ꢀ System Information Viewer  
Provides the functions to view information on the processor (CPU) and the BIOS and export it  
to a text file.  
ꢀ System Information Management  
Provides the function to make a back-up copy of your data. Without the backup data, the  
system-specific information and/or configuration may not be restored.  
TIPS: For information on making backup copy of system information, see the separate  
volume “User’s Guide (Setup)”. Only the authorized personnel are allowed to restore the  
backup data.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-11  
RELOCATING/STORING THE NEC Express5800/ft series  
Follow the procedure below to relocate or store the server. (Users should not attempt to remove the  
rack-mountable server from the rack assembly.)  
WARNING  
Do not attempt to remove the server.  
To avoid the risk of personal injury, users should not attempt to remove the  
server from the rack assembly. Removal of the server from the rack assembly  
should be performed by suitably trained maintenance personnel.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. There are risks of a  
fire, personal injury, or property damage. See PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY in  
Chapter 1 for details.  
• Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself.  
• Do not install the server in any place other than specified.  
• Do not connect/disconnect any interface cable with the power cord of the  
server plugged to a power source.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀ If the server needs to be relocated/stored due to a change in the floor layout to a great extent,  
contact the sales agent.  
ꢀ Make sure to make a backup copy of your valuable data in the hard disk, if any.  
ꢀWhen moving the server with hard disks, make sure not to give a shock to the hard disks.  
ꢀ When storing the server, keep it under storing environment conditions (temperature: -10 to  
55°C, humidity: 20 to 80%, non-condensing).  
157. Take a floppy disk and a CD-ROM out of the server, if any.  
158. Power off the server.  
159. Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet.  
160. Remove all the cables from the server.  
161. Remove all the mounted modules.  
162. If the server is a rack-mount model, remove the backplane and the rails from the rack  
cabinet.  
163. Carry the backplane, rails and modules separately.  
IMPORTANT: If the server is a tower model, do not hold the front bezel to lift it.  
The front bezel may get detached and fall off from the server, causing damage to the  
server.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-12  
164. Protect the server with the shock-absorbing materials, and pack it securely.  
IMPORTANT:  
Check and adjust the system clock before operating the server again after relocating or  
storing it.  
If the server and the built-in optional devices are moved from a cold place to a warm place  
in a short time, condensation will occur and cause malfunctions and breakdown when these  
are used in such state. When you start operating these equipments again after the  
transportation or the storage, make sure to wait for a sufficient period of time to use them in  
the operating environment.  
If the system clock goes out of alignment remarkably as time goes by, though the system  
clock adjustment is performed, contact your sales agent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
Troubleshooting  
If the product does not work properly, see this chapter before deciding that it is a breakdown.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-2  
TO LOCATE THE ERRORS  
Use NEC ESMPRO to monitor the occurrence of fault during the system operation.  
Especially take note on whether any alert is reported to NEC ESMPRO Manager on the language  
PC. Check whether any alert is reported on the Operation Window, Data Viewer, or Alert Viewer of  
NEC ESMPRO Manager.  
[Example]  
NEC ESMPRO Manager  
Determine type and location of  
server/workstation trouble.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-3  
ERROR MESSAGES  
If the NEC Express5800/ft series enters the abnormal state, the error is posted by various means.  
This section explains the types of error messages.  
Error Messages by LED Indication  
The LEDs on the front and rear panels of the NEC Express5800/ft series and near the handles of  
hard disks inform the user of the various server statuses by the colors and the patterns of going on,  
going off, and flashing. If trouble seems to have occurred, check the LED indication. For the LED  
indication and meanings, see Chapter 2.  
Error Messages on the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)  
The LCD on the front panel of the NEC Express5800/ft series displays the NEC Express5800/ft  
series status all the time. If an error occurs, the LCD displays the error message.  
The following tables show the messages that are to be displayed on the LCD, and explain the  
meanings and procedures:  
IMPORTANT: Although NEC Express5800/320Lb(-R) does not have an LCD on its front,  
you can check error messages from NEC MWA or NEC ESMPRO Manager as follows:  
ꢀNEC MWA: On a desired server, select [Start BMC dialog] from the Server menu. BMC  
dialog box will show the LCD status as well as server power status and LED status.  
ꢀNEC ESMPRO Manager: On Operation Window, select a desired server and start Data  
Viewer. You can check the messages on Data Viewer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-4  
STATUS LED  
Color State  
Suspected  
module  
Indication  
Explanation  
Procedure  
= A =  
AmbientTempAlm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module  
Amber Lit CPU module  
Amber Blink CPU module  
Amber Lit CPU module  
Temperature alarm (lower  
limit)  
Fatal temperature alarm  
(lower limit)  
Temperature alarm (upper  
limit)  
Fatal temperature alarm  
(upper limit)  
Contact your sales agent.  
AmbientTempAlm  
02  
AmbientTempAlm  
07  
AmbientTempAlm  
09  
= B =  
BMC Unsync  
-
-
PCI module #1  
The BMC cannot be  
synchronized.  
Contact your sales agent.  
BMC0 Not Ready  
BMC1 Not Ready  
Green Blink PCI module #1  
Green Blink PCI module #2  
PCI module’s BMC is  
disconnected  
If disconnection continues  
for a while, contact your  
sales agent.  
= C =  
Cor0 +12vAlm 00  
Amber Blink PCI module #1  
Amber Lit PCI module #1  
Amber Blink PCI module #1  
Amber Lit PCI module #1  
12-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Fatal 12-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
12-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Fatal 12-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
Contact your sales agent.  
Cor0 +12vAlm 02  
Cor0 +12vAlm 07  
Cor0 +12vAlm 09  
Cor0 +2.5vAlm  
00  
Amber Blink PCI module #1 2.5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Cor0 +2.5vAlm  
02  
Amber Lit PCI module #1  
Fatal 2.5-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
Cor0 +2.5vAlm  
07  
Amber Blink PCI module #1 2.5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Cor0 +2.5vAlm  
09  
Amber Lit PCI module #1  
Fatal 2.5-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
Cor0 +3.3vAlm  
00  
Amber Blink PCI module #1 3.3-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Cor0 +3.3vAlm  
02  
Amber Lit PCI module #1  
Fatal 3.3-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
Cor0 +3.3vAlm  
07  
Amber Blink PCI module #1 3.3-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Cor0 +3.3vAlm  
09  
Amber Lit PCI module #1  
Fatal 3.3-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
Cor0 +3.3vsAlm  
00  
Amber Blink PCI module #1 3.3-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Cor0 +3.3vsAlm  
02  
Amber Lit PCI module #1  
Fatal 3.3-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
Cor0 +3.3vsAlm  
07  
Amber Blink PCI module #1 3.3-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Cor0 +3.3vsAlm  
09  
Amber Lit PCI module #1  
Fatal 3.3-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
Cor0 +5.0vAlm  
00  
Amber Blink PCI module #1 5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Cor0 +5.0vAlm  
02  
Amber Lit PCI module #1  
Fatal 5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Cor0 +5.0vAlm  
07  
Amber Blink PCI module #1 5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-5  
STATUS LED  
Color State  
Suspected  
module  
Indication  
Explanation  
Procedure  
Cor0 +5.0vAlm  
09  
Amber Lit PCI module #1  
Fatal 5-V power voltage alarm Contact your sales agent.  
(upper limit)  
Cor0 +5.0vsAlm  
00  
Amber Blink PCI module #1 5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Cor0 +5.0vsAlm  
02  
Amber Lit PCI module #1  
Fatal 5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Cor0 +5.0vsAlm  
07  
Amber Blink PCI module #1 5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Cor0 +5.0vsAlm  
09  
Amber Lit PCI module #1  
Amber Blink PCI module #1  
Amber Lit PCI module #1  
Amber Blink PCI module #1  
Amber Lit PCI module #1  
Fatal 5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
-12-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Fatal -12-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
-12-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Fatal -12-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
Cor0 -12vAlm 00  
Cor0 -12vAlm 02  
Cor0 -12vAlm 07  
Cor0 -12vAlm 09  
Contact your sales agent.  
Cor0BusPERR01  
Cor0BusSERR01  
Cor0 CLK Alm 00  
Cor0 CLK Alm 02  
Green Blink PCI module #1  
Green Blink PCI module #1  
Amber Blink CLOCK board  
Amber Lit CLOCK board  
PCI bus parity error  
Fatal PCI bus error  
Clockalarm (lower limit)  
Fatal Clockalarm (lower  
limit)  
Cor0 CLK Alm 07  
Cor0 CLK Alm 09  
Amber Blink CLOCK board  
Amber Lit CLOCK board  
Clockalarm (upper limit)  
Fatal Clockalarm (upper  
limit)  
Cor0 FAN Alm 01  
Cor0 FAN Alm 02  
Cor0 FAN Alm 03  
Cor0 FAN Alm 04  
Cor0 FAN Alm 05  
Amber Blink PCI module #1  
Amber Blink PCI module #1  
Amber Blink PCI module #1  
Amber Blink PCI module #1  
Amber Blink PCI module #1  
Cooling fan1 alarm  
Cooling fan2 alarm  
Cooling fan3 alarm  
Cooling fan4 alarm  
Cooling fan5 alarm  
Check to see if dust is  
accumulated on the  
internal fans. Check also if  
the fan cables are  
connected securely. If not  
solved by the above,  
contact your sales agent.  
Cor0 offline  
Green Blink PCI module #1  
PCI module logically isolated Start the PCI module by ft  
sever utility or dismount  
and remount that module.  
If not solved by the above,  
contact your sales agent.  
Cor0 removed  
Green Blink PCI module #1  
PCI module detached  
Dismount and remount the  
PCI module. If not solved  
by the above, contact your  
sales agent.  
Cor0TempAlm00  
Cor0TempAlm02  
Cor0TempAlm07  
Cor0TempAlm09  
Amber Blink PCI module #1  
Amber Lit PCI module #1  
Amber Blink PCI module #1  
Amber Lit PCI module #1  
Temperature alarm (lower  
limit)  
Fatal temperature alarm  
(lower limit)  
Temperature alarm (upper  
limit)  
Fatal temperature alarm  
(upper limit)  
Check to see if dust is  
accumulated on the  
internal fans. Check also if  
the fan cables are  
connected securely. If not  
solved by the above,  
contact your sales agent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-6  
STATUS LED  
Color State  
Suspected  
module  
Indication  
Explanation  
Procedure  
Cor1 +12vAlm 00  
Amber Blink PCI module #2  
Amber Lit PCI module #2  
Amber Blink PCI module #2  
Amber Lit PCI module #2  
12-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Fatal 12-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
12-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Fatal 12-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
Contact your sales agent.  
Cor1 +12vAlm 02  
Cor1 +12vAlm 07  
Cor1 +12vAlm 09  
Cor1 +2.5vAlm  
00  
Amber Blink PCI module #2 2.5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Cor1 +2.5vAlm  
02  
Amber Lit PCI module #2  
Fatal 2.5-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
Cor1 +2.5vAlm  
07  
Amber Blink PCI module #2 2.5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Cor1 +2.5vAlm  
09  
Amber Lit PCI module #2  
Fatal 2.5-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
Cor1 +3.3vAlm  
00  
Amber Blink PCI module #2 3.3-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Cor1 +3.3vAlm  
02  
Amber Lit PCI module #2  
Fatal 3.3-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
Contact your sales agent.  
Cor1 +3.3vAlm  
07  
Amber Blink PCI module #2 3.3-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Cor1 +3.3vAlm  
09  
Amber Lit PCI module #2  
Fatal 3.3-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
Cor1 +3.3vsAlm  
00  
Amber Blink PCI module #2 3.3-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Cor1 +3.3vsAlm  
02  
Amber Lit PCI module #2  
Fatal 3.3-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
Cor1 +3.3vsAlm  
07  
Amber Blink PCI module #2 3.3-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Cor1 +3.3vsAlm  
09  
Amber Lit PCI module #2  
Fatal 3.3-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
Cor1 +5.0vAlm  
00  
Amber Blink PCI module #2 5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Cor1 +5.0vAlm  
02  
Amber Lit PCI module #2  
Fatal 5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Cor1 +5.0vAlm  
07  
Amber Blink PCI module #2 5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Cor1 +5.0vAlm  
09  
Amber Lit PCI module #2  
Fatal 5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Cor1 +5.0vsAlm  
00  
Amber Blink PCI module #2 5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Cor1 +5.0vsAlm  
02  
Amber Lit PCI module #2  
Fatal 5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Cor1 +5.0vsAlm  
07  
Amber Blink PCI module #2 5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Cor1 +5.0vsAlm  
09  
Amber Lit PCI module #2  
Amber Blink PCI module #2  
Amber Lit PCI module #2  
Fatal 5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
-12-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Fatal -12-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
Cor1 -12vAlm 00  
Cor1 -12vAlm 02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-7  
STATUS LED  
Color State  
Suspected  
module  
Indication  
Explanation  
Procedure  
Cor1 -12vAlm 07  
Amber Blink PCI module #2  
-12-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Contact your sales agent.  
Cor1 -12vAlm 09  
Amber Lit PCI module #2  
Fatal -12-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
Cor1BusPERR01  
Cor1BusSERR01  
Cor1 CLK Alm 00  
Cor1 CLK Alm 02  
Green Blink PCI module #2  
Green Blink PCI module #2  
Amber Blink CLOCK board  
Amber Lit CLOCK board  
PCI bus parity error  
Fatal PCI bus error  
Clockalarm (lower limit)  
Fatal Clockalarm (lower  
limit)  
Cor1 CLK Alm 07  
Cor1 CLK Alm 09  
Amber Blink CLOCK board  
Amber Lit CLOCK board  
Clockalarm (upper limit)  
Fatal Clockalarm (upper  
limit)  
Cor1 FAN Alm 01  
Cor1 FAN Alm 02  
Cor1 FAN Alm 03  
Cor1 FAN Alm 04  
Cor1 FAN Alm 05  
Amber Blink PCI module #2  
Amber Blink PCI module #2  
Amber Blink PCI module #2  
Amber Blink PCI module #2  
Amber Blink PCI module #2  
Cooling fan1 alarm  
Cooling fan2 alarm  
Cooling fan3 alarm  
Cooling fan4 alarm  
Cooling fan5 alarm  
Check to see if dust is  
accumulated on the  
internal fans. Check also if  
the fan cables are  
connected securely. If not  
solved by the above,  
contact your sales agent.  
Cor1 offline  
Green Blink PCI module #2  
PCI module logically isolated Start the PCI module by ft  
sever utility or dismount  
and remount that module.  
If not solved by the above,  
contact your sales agent.  
Cor1 removed  
Green Blink PCI module #2  
PCI module detached  
Dismount and remount the  
PCI module. If not solved  
by the above, contact your  
sales agent.  
Cor1TempAlm00  
Cor1TempAlm02  
Cor1TempAlm07  
Cor1TempAlm09  
Amber Blink PCI module #2  
Amber Lit PCI module #2  
Amber Blink PCI module #2  
Amber Lit PCI module #2  
Temperature alarm (lower  
limit)  
Fatal temperature alarm  
(lower limit)  
Temperature alarm (upper  
limit)  
Fatal temperature alarm  
(upper limit)  
Check to see if dust is  
accumulated on the  
internal fans. Check also if  
the fan cables are  
connected securely. If not  
solved by the above,  
contact your sales agent.  
CPU IERR 00  
CPU IERR 01  
CPU IERR 20  
CPU IERR 21  
CPU T-Trip 00  
Green Blink CPU module #1 CPU#1 internal error  
Green Blink CPU module #1 CPU#2 internal error  
Green Blink CPU module #2 CPU#1 internal error  
Green Blink CPU module #2 CPU#2 internal error  
Green Blink CPU module #1 CPU#1 thermal change error  
(upper limit)  
Contact your sales agent.  
CPU T-Trip 01  
CPU T-Trip 20  
CPU T-Trip 21  
Green Blink CPU module #1 CPU#2 thermal change error  
(upper limit)  
Green Blink CPU module #2 CPU#1 thermal change error  
(upper limit)  
Green Blink CPU module #2 CPU#2 thermal change error  
(upper limit)  
CPU0 +12ss Alm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 +12-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
CPU0 +12ss Alm  
02  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal +12-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-8  
STATUS LED  
Color State  
Suspected  
module  
Indication  
Explanation  
Procedure  
CPU0 +12ss Alm  
07  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 +12-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Contact your sales agent.  
CPU0 +12ss Alm  
09  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal +12-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
CPU0+12vAlm00  
CPU0+12vAlm02  
CPU0+12vAlm07  
CPU0+12vAlm09  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 12-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal 12-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 12-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal 12-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
CPU0 +1.5v Alm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 1.5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
CPU0 +1.5v Alm  
02  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal 1.5-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
CPU0 +1.5v Alm  
07  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 1.5-V power voltage alarm  
Contact your sales agent.  
(upper limit)  
CPU0 +1.5v Alm  
09  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal 1.5-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
CPU0 +2.5vAlm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 2.5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
CPU0 +2.5vAlm  
02  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal 2.5-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
CPU0 +2.5vAlm  
07  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 2.5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU0 +2.5vAlm  
09  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal 2.5-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
CPU0 +2.5VcAlm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 2.5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
CPU0 +2.5VcAlm  
02  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal 2.5-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
CPU0 +2.5VcAlm  
07  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 2.5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU0 +2.5VcAlm  
09  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal 2.5-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
CPU0 +3.3vAlm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 3.3-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
CPU0 +3.3vAlm  
02  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal 3.3-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
CPU0 +3.3vAlm  
07  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 3.3-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU0 +3.3vAlm  
09  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal 3.3-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
CPU0 +3.3vsAlm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 3.3-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
CPU0 +3.3vsAlm  
02  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal 3.3-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
CPU0 +3.3vsAlm  
07  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 3.3-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU0 +3.3vsAlm  
09  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal 3.3-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
CPU0 +5.0vAlm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
CPU0 +5.0vAlm  
02  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal 5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-9  
STATUS LED  
Color State  
Suspected  
module  
Indication  
Explanation  
Procedure  
CPU0 +5.0vAlm  
07  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Contact your sales agent.  
CPU0 +5.0vAlm  
09  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal 5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU0 +5.0vsAlm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
CPU0 +5.0vsAlm  
02  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal 5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
CPU0 +5.0vsAlm  
07  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU0 +5.0vsAlm  
09  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal 5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU0 broken  
Green Blink CPU module #1 CPU module breakdown  
CPU0 FAN Alm 01 Amber Blink CPU module #1 Cooling fan1 alarm  
CPU0 FAN Alm 03 Amber Blink CPU module #1 Cooling fan2 alarm  
CPU0 FAN Alm 04 Amber Blink CPU module #1 Cooling fan3 alarm  
Check to see if dust is  
accumulated on the  
internal fans. Check also if  
the fan cables are  
connected securely. If not  
solved by the above,  
contact your sales agent.  
CPU0 offline  
Green Blink CPU module #1 PCI module logically isolated Start the PCI module by ft  
sever utility or dismount  
and remount that module.  
If not solved by the above,  
contact your sales agent.  
CPU0 removed  
Green Blink CPU module #1 PCI module detached  
Dismount and remount the  
PCI module. If not solved  
by the above, contact your  
sales agent.  
CPU0 Temp Alm 00 Amber Blink CPU module #1 Temperature alarm (lower  
Check to see if dust is  
accumulated on the  
limit)  
internal fans. Check also if  
the fan cables are  
CPU0 Temp Alm 02 Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal temperature alarm  
(lower limit)  
connected securely. If not  
solved by the above,  
contact your sales agent.  
CPU0 Temp Alm 07 Amber Blink CPU module #1 Temperature alarm (upper  
limit)  
CPU0 Temp Alm 09 Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal temperature alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU0 VccpAlm 00 Amber Blink CPU module #1 CPU operating voltage alarm Contact your sales agent.  
(lower limit) (VCCP)  
CPU0 VccpAlm 02 Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal CPU operating voltage  
alarm (lower limit) (VCCP)  
CPU0 VccpAlm 07 Amber Blink CPU module #1 CPU operating voltage alarm  
(upper limit) (VCCP)  
CPU0 VccpAlm 09 Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal CPU operating voltage  
alarm (upper limit) (VCCP)  
CPU0 Vtt Alm 00  
CPU0 Vtt Alm 02  
CPU0 Vtt Alm 07  
CPU0 Vtt Alm 09  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 1.25-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal 1.25-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 1.25-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 Fatal 1.25-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-10  
STATUS LED  
Color State  
Suspected  
module  
Indication  
Explanation  
Procedure  
CPU00 Temp Alm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 CPU#1 temperature alarm  
(lower limit)  
Check to see if dust is  
accumulated on the  
internal fans. Check also  
if the fan cables are  
CPU00 Temp Alm  
02  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 CPU#1fatal temperature alarm  
(lower limit)  
connected securely. If  
not solved by the above,  
contact your sales agent.  
CPU00 Temp Alm  
07  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 CPU#1temperature alarm  
(upper limit)  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 CPU#1 fatal temperature  
alarm (upper limit)  
CPU00 Temp Alm  
09  
CPU01 Temp Alm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 CPU#2 temperature alarm  
(lower limit)  
CPU01 Temp Alm  
02  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 CPU#2 fatal temperature  
alarm (lower limit)  
CPU01 Temp Alm  
07  
Amber Blink CPU module #1 CPU#2 temperature alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU01 Temp Alm  
09  
Amber Lit CPU module #1 CPU#2 fatal temperature  
alarm (upper limit)  
CPU2 +12ss Alm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 12-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Contact your sales  
agent.  
CPU2 +12ss Alm  
02  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 12-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
CPU2 +12ss Alm  
07  
12-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Amber Blink CPU module #2  
CPU2 +12ss Alm  
09  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 12-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
CPU2+12vAlm00  
CPU2+12vAlm02  
CPU2+12vAlm07  
CPU2+12vAlm09  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 12-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 12-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
12-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Amber Blink CPU module #2  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 12-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
CPU2 +1.5vAlm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 1.5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
CPU2 +1.5vAlm  
02  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 1.5-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
CPU2 +1.5vAlm  
07  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 1.5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU2 +1.5vAlm  
09  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 1.5-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
CPU2 +2.5vAlm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 2.5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Contact your sales  
agent.  
CPU2 +2.5vAlm  
02  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 2.5-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
CPU2 +2.5vAlm  
07  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 2.5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU2 +2.5vAlm  
09  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 2.5-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-11  
STATUS LED  
Color State  
Suspected  
module  
Indication  
Explanation  
Procedure  
CPU2 +2.5VcAlm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 2.5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Contact your sales  
agent.  
CPU2 +2.5VcAlm  
02  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 2.5-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
CPU2 +2.5VcAlm  
07  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 2.5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU2 +2.5VcAlm  
09  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 2.5-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
CPU2 +3.3vAlm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 3.3-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
CPU2 +3.3vAlm  
02  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 3.3-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
CPU2 +3.3vAlm  
07  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 3.3-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU2 +3.3vAlm  
09  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 3.3-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
CPU2 +3.3vsAlm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 3.3-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
CPU2 +3.3vsAlm  
02  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 3.3-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
CPU2 +3.3vsAlm  
07  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 3.3-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU2 +3.3vsAlm  
09  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 3.3-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
CPU2 +5.0vAlm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
CPU2 +5.0vAlm  
02  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
CPU2 +5.0vAlm  
07  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU2 +5.0vAlm  
09  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU2  
+5.0vsAlm00  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
CPU2  
+5.0vsAlm02  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 5-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
CPU2  
+5.0vsAlm07  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU2  
+5.0vsAlm09  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 5-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU2 broken  
Green Blink CPU module #2 CPU module breakdown  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 Cooling fan 1 alarm  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 Cooling fan 2 alarm  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 Cooling fan 3 alarm  
CPU2 FAN Alm 01  
CPU2 FAN Alm 03  
CPU2 FAN Alm 04  
Check to see if dust is  
accumulated on the  
internal fans. Check also  
if the fan cables are  
connected securely. If  
not solved by the above,  
contact your sales agent.  
Start the PCI module by  
ft sever utility or  
CPU2 offline  
Green Blink CPU module #2 The CPU module has been  
logically disconnected.  
dismount and remount  
that module. If not  
solved by the above,  
contact your sales  
agent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-12  
STATUS LED  
Color State  
Suspected  
module  
Indication  
Explanation  
Procedure  
CPU2 removed  
Green Blink CPU module #2 The CPU module has come  
off.  
Dismount and remount  
the PCI module. If not  
solved by the above,  
contact your sales  
agent.  
CPU2TempAlm00  
CPU2TempAlm02  
CPU2TempAlm07  
CPU2TempAlm09  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 Temperature alarm (lower  
Check to see if dust is  
accumulated on the  
internal fans. Check also  
if the fan cables are  
connected securely. If  
not solved by the above,  
contact your sales  
agent.  
limit)  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal temperature alarm (lower  
limit)  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 Temperature alarm (upper  
limit)  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal temperature alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU2 VccpAlm 00  
CPU2 VccpAlm 02  
CPU2 VccpAlm 07  
CPU2 VccpAlm 09  
CPU2 VttAlm 00  
CPU2 VttAlm 02  
CPU2 VttAlm 07  
CPU2 VttAlm 09  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 CPU operating voltage alarm Contact your sales  
(lower limit) (VCCP)  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal CPU operating voltage  
alarm (lower limit) (VCCP)  
agent.  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 CPU operating voltage alarm  
(upper limit) (VCCP)  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal CPU operating voltage  
alarm (upper limit) (VCCP)  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 1.25-V power voltage alarm  
(lower limit)  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 1.25-V power voltage  
alarm (lower limit)  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 1.25-V power voltage alarm  
(upper limit)  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal 1.25-V power voltage  
alarm (upper limit)  
CPU20 TempAlm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 CPU#1 temperature alarm  
(lower limit)  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal CPU#1 temperature  
alarm (lower limit)  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 CPU#1 temperature alarm  
(upper limit)  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal CPU#1 temperature  
alarm (upper limit)  
Check to see if dust is  
accumulated on the  
internal fans. Check also  
if the fan cables are  
connected securely. If  
not solved by the above,  
contact your sales  
agent.  
CPU20 TempAlm  
02  
CPU20 TempAlm  
07  
CPU20 TempAlm  
09  
CPU21 TempAlm  
00  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 CPU#2 temperature alarm  
(lower limit)  
CPU21 TempAlm  
02  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal CPU#2 temperature  
alarm (lower limit)  
CPU21 TempAlm  
07  
Amber Blink CPU module #2 CPU#2 temperature alarm  
(upper limit)  
CPU21 TempAlm  
09  
Amber Lit CPU module #2 Fatal CPU#2 temperature  
alarm (upper limit)  
= D =  
DUMP Request!  
Off  
Off  
-
-
DUMP switch request  
Contact your sales  
agent.  
= F =  
FRB Processing  
During POST execution or OS The server is operating  
start processing normally.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-13  
STATUS LED  
Color State  
Suspected  
module  
Indication  
= M =  
Explanation  
Procedure  
Memory U-Err 01  
Memory U-Err 02  
Memory U-Err 03  
Memory U-Err 04  
Memory U-Err 05  
Memory U-Err 06  
Memory U-Err 21  
Memory U-Err 22  
Memory U-Err 23  
Memory U-Err 24  
Memory U-Err 25  
Memory U-Err 26  
= O =  
Green Blink CPU module #1 DIMM#1 2-bit error  
Green Blink CPU module #1 DIMM#2 2-bit error  
Green Blink CPU module #1 DIMM#3 2-bit error  
Green Blink CPU module #1 DIMM#4 2-bit error  
Green Blink CPU module #1 DIMM#5 2-bit error  
Green Blink CPU module #1 DIMM#6 2-bit error  
Green Blink CPU module #2 DIMM#1 2-bit error  
Green Blink CPU module #2 DIMM#2 2-bit error  
Green Blink CPU module #2 DIMM#3 2-bit error  
Green Blink CPU module #2 DIMM#4 2-bit error  
Green Blink CPU module #2 DIMM#5 2-bit error  
Green Blink CPU module #2 DIMM#6 2-bit error  
The DIMM must be  
replaced. Contact a  
maintenance service  
company.  
OS shutdown Alm  
Off  
-
Shutdown due to a timeout  
error of the watch dog timer  
(fatal error)  
Contact your sales agent.  
= P =  
Power-off  
= S =  
Off  
Off  
-
-
The DC power is turned off.  
-
SSR Processing  
Reboot processing for  
recovery  
DUMP is being collected.  
= W =  
WDT timeout  
Off  
-
Timeout error of the watch dog Contact your sales agent.  
timer (fatal error)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-14  
POST Error Messages  
Powering on the server automatically starts the self-diagnostic program, POST (Power On  
Self-Test). When POST detects any error, it displays an error message and its measure on the  
display unit. Follow the table below to troubleshoot such errors.  
Phoenix BIOS 4.0 Release 6.0.XXXX  
:
CPU=Pentium III XXX MHz  
0640K System RAM Passed  
0127M Extended RAM Passed  
WARNING:  
02B0: Diskette drive A error.  
:
press <F1> to resume, <F2> to SETUP  
Message indicating a floppy disk drive error  
TIPS: For error messages on optional PCI board, refer to the manual provided with those  
options.  
On-screen error message  
Cause  
Action  
0200 Failure Fixed Disk  
•
Configuration error in  
•
Check configuration in  
Setup menu.  
Setup menu.  
•
•
Hard disk is faulty.  
CPU module board is  
faulty.  
•
•
Replace the hard disk.  
Replace the CPU module  
board.  
•
PCI module board is  
faulty.  
•
•
Replace the PCI module  
board.  
0210 Stuck Key  
Keyboard connection error  
Disconnect the keyboard  
and connect it back again.  
Replace the keyboard.  
Replace the PCI module  
board.  
•
•
0211 Keyboard error  
0212 Keyboard Controller  
Failed  
Keyboard is faulty.  
Keyboard controller is faulty.  
•
Check the keyboard  
connection.  
Restart the server.  
Replace the PCI module  
board.  
•
•
0213 Keyboard locked -  
Unlock key switch  
Keyboard is locked.  
Unlock the key switch.  
0220 Monitor type does not  
match CMOS - Run  
SETUP  
Illegal monitor type is  
specified.  
•
Select "Get Default Value"  
from the Setup menu.  
Clear the CMOS data.  
Replace DIMM.  
Replace the CPU module  
board.  
Replace DIMM.  
Replace the CPU module  
board.  
•
•
•
0230 System RAM Failed at  
offset  
DIMM is faulty.  
DIMM is faulty.  
0231 Shadow RAM Failed at  
offset  
•
•
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-15  
On-screen error message  
Cause  
Action  
0232 Extend RAM Failed at  
address line  
DIMM is faulty.  
•
•
Replace DIMM.  
Replace the CPU module  
board.  
0233 Memory type mixing  
detected  
DIMMs of the different types  
are installed.  
Replace DIMM with  
appropriate one.  
0234 Single - bit ECC error  
DIMM is faulty.  
•
•
Replace DIMM.  
Replace the CPU module  
board.  
0235 Multiple - bit ECC error  
DIMM is faulty.  
•
•
Replace DIMM.  
Replace the CPU module  
board.  
0250 System battery is dead  
-Replace and run  
SETUP  
0251 System CMOS  
checksum bad-Default  
configuration used  
NvRAM battery is dead.  
NvRAM is faulty.  
Replace the CPU module  
board.  
•
•
•
•
Re-configure using the  
Setup menu.  
Replace the PCI module  
board.  
Re-set the password in  
the Setup menu.  
Replace the PCI module  
board.  
0252 Password checksum bad NvRAM is faulty.  
-Password cleared  
0260 System timer error  
0270 Real time clock error  
PCI module board is faulty.  
Replace the PCI module  
board.  
Replace the PCI module  
board.  
RTC is faulty.  
0271 Check date and time  
setting  
Date and time of RTC are  
incorrectly set.  
•
Set the correct date and  
time in Setup menu.  
Replace the PCI module  
board.  
•
0280 Previous boot incomplete Configuration error in Setup  
Check configuration in Setup  
menu.  
-Default configuration  
used  
menu.  
02B0 Diskette drive A error  
Floppy drive A is faulty.  
Replace the floppy disk drive  
A.  
02B2 Incorrect Drive A type -  
run SETUP  
Configuration error in Setup  
menu.  
Specify the correct drive type  
in Setup menu.  
02D0 System cache error -  
Cache disabled  
•
•
CPU is faulty.  
CPU module board is  
•
•
Replace the CPU.  
Replace the CPU module  
faulty.  
PCI device is faulty.  
board.  
Replace the PCI device  
board.  
Re-install the PCI device  
board.  
Re-configure the PCI  
board.  
0B1B PCI System Error on  
Bus/Device/Function  
0B1C PCI Parity Error on  
Bus/Device/Function  
•
•
•
PCI device is faulty.  
0B22 CPUs are installed out of CPU is faulty.  
order  
Replace the CPU.  
0B28 Unsupported Processor  
The processor (CPU) not  
Install the CPU appropriate to  
the server.  
detected on Processor 1 supported by this server is  
installed in Processor 1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-16  
On-screen error message  
Cause  
Action  
0B29 Unsupported Processor  
The processor (CPU) not  
Install the CPU appropriate to  
the server.  
detected on Processor 2 supported by this server is  
installed in Processor 2.  
0B30 CPU FAN #1 Alarm  
occurred  
0B31 CPU FAN #2 Alarm  
occurred  
•
•
•
Dusts are clogged in fan.  
Fan is faulty.  
CPU module board is  
•
•
Replace the fan.  
Replace the CPU module  
board.  
Connect fan cable  
properly.  
faulty.  
•
0B32 CPU FAN #3 Alarm  
occurred  
•
•
•
Dusts are clogged in fan.  
Fan is faulty.  
CPU module board is  
•
•
Replace the fan.  
Replace the CPU module  
board.  
Connect fan cable  
properly.  
Reset the setting by  
selecting [Yes] at [Reset  
Configuration Data]  
Replace the CPU/PCI  
module board.  
faulty.  
•
•
0B40 Invalid System  
Configuration Data  
•
•
Configuration error in  
SETUP.  
CPU/PCI module board is  
faulty.  
•
•
0B41 System Configuration  
Data Read error  
•
•
Configuration error in  
SETUP.  
CPU/PCI module board is  
faulty.  
Reset the setting by  
selecting [Yes] at [Reset  
Configuration Data]  
Replace the CPU/PCI  
module board.  
•
0B42 Resource Conflict  
Configuration error in SETUP.  
Configuration error in SETUP.  
Configuration error in SETUP.  
Correct device configuration in  
SETUP  
Correct settings in SETUP  
0B43 Warning: IRQ not  
configured  
0B44 Expansion Rom not  
initialized  
In SETUP, disable  
decompression of expansion  
ROM on unnecessary optional  
PCI cards.  
0B45 System Configuration  
Data Write error  
•
•
Configuration error in  
SETUP.  
CPU/PCI module board is  
faulty.  
•
Reset the setting by  
selecting [Yes] at [Reset  
Configuration Data]  
Replace the CPU/PCI  
module board.  
•
0B47 Missing date and time  
synchronization  
The date and time are  
incorrect due to a  
communication error between  
BMCs.  
•
•
Restart the system.  
Re-set the date and time  
in SETUP.  
If the error persists, replace the  
PCI module board.  
0B49 BMC Issued Reset  
Command, but failed  
System Reset  
0B6E DIMMs are installed out  
of order  
•
•
System cannot be reset by Replace PCI module board.  
BMC’s reset command.  
DIMM is faulty.  
Replace DIMM.  
0B70 The error occurred  
during temperature  
sensor reading  
•
•
SMBus device is faulty.  
SMBus is faulty.  
Replace the CPU/PCI module  
or back panel board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-17  
On-screen error message  
Cause  
Action  
0B71 System temperature out  
of Range  
•
Ambient temperature is  
out of range.  
Fan is faulty.  
CPU/PCI module board is  
faulty.  
•
Check the setting in  
SETUP  
Clean the fan.  
Replace the fan.  
Replace the CPU/PCI  
module board.  
•
•
•
•
•
0B80 BMC Memory Test Failed BMC is faulty.  
0B81 BMC Firmware Code  
Area CRC check failed  
Replace the PCI module  
board.  
0B82 BMC core Hardware  
failure  
0B83 BMC IBF or OBF check  
failed  
0B90 BMC Platform  
Information Area  
corrupted  
BMC is faulty.  
Replace the PCI module  
board.  
0B91 BMC update firmware  
corrupted  
0B92 Internal Use Area of  
BMC FRU corrupted  
•
•
SROM is faulty.  
BMC is faulty.  
•
•
Replace the back panel  
board.  
Replace the PCI module  
board.  
0B93 BMC SDR Repository  
empty  
BMC is faulty.  
Replace the PCI module  
board.  
0B94 IPMB signal lines do not  
respond  
0B95 BMC FRU device failure  
0B96 BMC SDR Repository  
failure  
0B97 BMC SEL device failure  
0B98 BMC SEL Overflow  
SEL (System Event Log)  
overflowed.  
Erase the unnecessary SEL.  
Replace the back panel board.  
0BB0 SMBIOS - SROM data  
read error  
•
•
SROM is faulty.  
Front panel board is faulty.  
0BB1 SMBIOS - SROM data  
checksum bad  
0BD0 1st SMBus device  
address not  
acknowledged  
0BD1 1st SMBus device Error  
detected  
PCI module board #1 is faulty.  
CPU module board #1 is faulty.  
•
•
Check cable connection.  
Replace the board.  
0BD2 1st SMBus timeout  
0BD3 2nd SMBus device  
address not  
acknowledged  
0BD4 2nd SMBus device Error  
detected  
0BD5 2nd SMBus timeout  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-18  
On-screen error message  
Cause  
Action  
0BD6 3rd SMBus device  
address not  
•
•
Check cable connection.  
Replace the board.  
acknowledged  
-
0BD7 3rd SMBus device Error  
detected  
(3rd SMBus does not exist)  
0BD8 3rd SMBus timeout  
0BD9 4th SMBus device  
address not  
CPU module board #2 is faulty.  
acknowledged  
0BDA 4th SMBus device Error  
Detected  
0BDB 4th SMBus device  
timeout  
0BDC 5th SMBus device  
address not  
acknowledged  
-
0BDD 5th SMBus device Error  
detected  
(5th SMBus does not exist)  
0BDE 5th SMBus timeout  
0BDF 6th SMBus device  
address not  
acknowledged  
-
0BE0 6th SMBus device Error  
detected  
(6th SMBus does not exist)  
0BE1 6th SMBus timeout  
0BE2 7th SMBus device  
address not  
acknowledged  
0BE3 7th SMBus device Error  
detected  
0BE4 7th SMBus timeout  
0BE5 8th SMBus device  
address not  
acknowledged  
0BE6 8th SMBus device Error  
detected  
Back panel board is faulty.  
PCI module board #1 is faulty.  
Back panel board is faulty.  
0BE7 8th SMBus timeout  
0BF0 Vendor ID cannot be  
retrieved from BP  
IDPROM  
Replace the back panel board.  
0BF1 System Structure cannot  
be retrieved from BP  
IDPROM  
0C00 Rompilot reports error  
number xx  
•
•
Configuration error in  
SETUP.  
CPU/PCI module board is  
faulty.  
•
•
Re-configure Rompilot.  
Replace the CPU/PCI  
module board.  
8600 No working DQS value  
found  
•
•
DIMM is faulty  
DIMM is not supported  
•
•
Replace DIMM  
Replace DIMM with  
appropriate one.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-19  
On-screen error message  
Cause  
Action  
8610 MAC Address update  
failed – CoreI/O#0  
10/100Mbit Ethernet  
Controller  
FRB2 timeout occurred when  
setting MAC address, and  
rewrite was unsuccessful.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace the back panel  
board.  
Replace the PCI module  
board 1.  
Replace the back panel  
board.  
Replace the PCI module  
board 1.  
Replace the back panel  
board.  
Replace the PCI module  
board 2.  
Replace the back panel  
board.  
Replace the PCI module  
board 2.  
8611 MAC Address update  
failed – CoreI/O#0 Gbit  
Ethernet Controller  
FRB2 timeout occurred when  
setting MAC address, and  
rewrite was unsuccessful.  
8612 MAC Address update  
failed – CoreI/O#1  
10/100 Mbit Ethernet  
Controller  
FRB2 timeout occurred when  
setting MAC address, and  
rewrite was unsuccessful.  
8613 MAC Address update  
failed – CoreI/O#1 Gbit  
Ethernet Controller  
FRB2 timeout occurred when  
setting MAC address, and  
rewrite was unsuccessful.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-20  
Error Notification by BEEP  
An error message may not be displayed on the display unit even though the POST detected an error.  
In such a case, the beep sounds notifies you an error. The error contents are indicated by the  
combination of beep sound patterns. For example, beep sounds once, consecutively three times,  
once, and then once (beep code: 1-3-1-1) indicates DRAM refresh test error.  
The following table lists the meaning of beep codes and measures against them.  
Beep code  
1-2-2-3  
Meaning  
ROM checksum  
error  
Action  
Contact your sales agent to replace the CPU module  
board.  
1-1-2-4  
1-3-1-1  
1-3-1-3  
ROMEXEC code  
error  
DRAM refresh test  
error  
Keyboard controller  
error  
Check the installation of DIMM board.  
If the error persists, contact your sales agent to replace  
the DIMM or CPU module board.  
Disconnect the keyboard and connect it back on. If the  
error persists, request your sales agent to replace the  
CPU module board.  
1-3-3-1  
1-3-3-2  
Failed to detect  
memory.  
Or, DIMM board  
type is incorrect.  
Initial setting error of  
the POST memory  
manager  
Check the installation of DIMM board.  
If the error persists, contact your sales agent to replace  
the DIMM or CPU module board.  
1-3-4-1  
1-3-4-3  
RAM address error  
RAM low byte data  
error  
1-4-1-1  
2-2-3-1  
2-1-2-3  
1-2  
RAM high byte data  
error  
Illegal interrupt test  
error  
Copyright check  
error  
Failed to initialize  
the video BIOS  
Contact your sales agent.  
Check the motherboard installation if nothing is  
displayed on the display unit. If the error persists,  
contact your sales agent to replace the CPU module  
board.  
Check the PCI board installation if the Option ROM of  
the added PCI board is not displayed. If the error  
persists, contact your sales agent to replace the CPU  
module board, PCI module board or added PCI board  
with new one.  
Failed to initialize  
the option ROM  
Failed to expand the  
option ROM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-21  
Linux Error Messages  
NEC Express5800/ft series displays messages on the console window when failures occur. Also, the  
same information is recorded as system logs.  
The following indicates the syslog messages, messages on the console, their meanings and actions:  
Message  
Meaning  
The status changed  
from SIMPLEX to  
DUPLEX  
Action  
The server is  
operating  
FT[dev.no] opstate SIMPLEX to DUPLEX  
normally.  
FT[dev.no] opstate ONLINE to DUPLEX  
FT[dev.no] opstate INITIALIZING to DUPLEX  
FT[dev.no] opstate BROKEN to DUPLEX  
The status changed  
from ONLINE to  
DUPLEX  
The status changed  
from INITIALIZING to  
DUPLEX  
The status changed  
from BROKEN to  
DUPLEX  
FT[dev.no] opstate INITIALIZING to  
DIAGNOSTICS  
The status changed  
from INITIALIZING to  
DIAGNOSTICS  
The status changed  
from INITIALIZING to  
ONLINE  
The status changed  
from ONLINE to  
INITIALIZING  
FT[dev.no] opstate INITIALIZING to ONLINE  
FT[dev.no] opstate ONLINE to INITIALIZING  
FT[dev.no] opstate DIAGNOSTICS to  
DIAGNOSTICS_PASSED  
Diagnostics have  
completed  
FT[dev.no] opstate UNKNOWN to INITIALIZING  
The status changed  
from UNKNOWN to  
INITIALIZING  
FT[dev.no] opstate SIMPLEX to BROKEN  
FT[dev.no] opstate UNKNOWN to EMPTY  
FT[dev.no] opstate INITIALIZING to BROKEN  
The status changed  
from SIMPLEX to  
BROKEN  
The status changed  
from UNKNOWN to  
EMPTY  
Contact your  
sales agent.  
Failed to start the  
device  
Start the server  
again. If the  
problem persists,  
contact your sales  
agent.  
FT[dev.no] operation BRINGUP failed  
Failed to start the  
device.  
Start the server  
again. If the  
problem persists,  
contact your sales  
agent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-22  
Message  
FT[dev.no] info error initializing PCI slots  
Meaning  
Action  
Failed to initialize the  
PCI slot.  
There is no  
problem if any  
devices are not  
connected to the  
PCI slot. In other  
cases, a board  
may be faulty.  
Contact your  
sales agent.  
FT[dev.no] info unable to access all offline memory HW status is invalid.  
FT[dev.no] info unable to clear hardware reset  
FT[dev.no] info unable to collect inventory  
FT[dev.no] info unable to configure chipset  
FT[dev.no] info unable to copy shadow memory  
FT[dev.no] info unable to map BIOS  
Contact your  
sales agent.  
FT[dev.no] info unable to map firmware  
FT[dev.no] info unable to power on CRU  
FT[dev.no] info unable to read gpr0  
FT[dev.no] info unable to set DIMM SPD  
FT[dev.no] info unable to read system MAC  
address  
Unable to read MAC  
address from the  
device’s NIC.  
Contact your  
sales agent.  
FT[dev.no] info BIOS incompatible  
FT[dev.no] info BIOS mismatch  
BIOS status is invalid.  
Contact your  
sales agent.  
FT[dev.no] info multiple BIOS miscompare  
FT[dev.no] info failed to update firmware  
FT[dev.no] info firmware does not match  
FT[dev.no] info firmware file error  
The device’s firmware  
is invalid.  
Contact your  
sales agent.  
FT[dev.no] info firmware image invalid  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-23  
Server Management Application Error Message  
If the server management tool such as NEC  
ESMPRO Agent, NEC ESMPRO Manager, or  
GAMServer has been installed in the NEC  
Express5800/ft series or management PC, you  
can obtain the error information from the display  
unit of the server or management PC.  
See Chapter 5, the separate volume of User’s  
Guide (Setup) or online documentation for  
details of such application programs.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-24  
SOLVING PROBLEMS  
When the server fails to operate as expected, see the following to find out your problem and follow  
the given instruction before asking for repair.  
If the server still fails to operate successfully after solving your problem, take a note on the  
on-screen message and contact your sales agent.  
Problems with NEC Express5800/ft series  
Fail to power on the server:  
ꢁ
Is the server properly supplied with power?  
→
Check if the power cord is connected to a power outlet (or UPS) that meets the  
power specifications for the server.  
→
→
Check if the two pieces of the provided power cord are connected to the main  
unit properly.  
Make sure to use the power cord provided with the server. Check the power cord  
for broken shield or bent plugs.  
→
→
Make sure the power breaker for the connected power outlet is on.  
If the power cord is plugged to a UPS, make sure the UPS is powered and it  
supplies power. See the manual that comes with the UPS for details.  
Power supply to the server may be linked with the connected UPS using the BIOS  
setup utility of the server.  
<Menu to check: [System Hardware] → [AC-LINK] → [Power On]>  
Make sure the POWER switch on the power unit is on.  
Did you press the POWER switch?  
→
→
ꢁ
Press the POWER switch on the front of the NEC Express5800/ft series to turn  
on the power (the POWER LED lights).  
ꢁ
Did you install the CPU/PCI module properly?  
→
Check if the CPU/PCI module is properly installed in the server. Secure the  
module with screw located on the module handle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-25  
Fail to power off the server:  
ꢁ
Is the POWER switch enabled?  
→
→
Restart the server and start the BIOS setup utility.  
<Menu to check: [Security] → [Power Switch Mask] → [Unmasked]>  
ꢁ
Are you trying to turn off the power other than by pressing the POWER switch?  
You cannot turn off the power of the server using the software command (e.g.,  
Shutdown command). Press the POWER switch to turn off.  
POST fails to complete:  
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Is the DIMM installed?  
→
→
At least a pair of DIMMs are required for operation.  
Is the memory size large?  
The memory check may take a time if the memory size is large. Wait for a while.  
Did you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after you started the  
server?  
→
→
If you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after start-up,  
POST may accidentally detect a keyboard controller error and stops proceeding.  
In such a case, restart the server once again. Do not perform any keyboard or  
mouse operation until the BIOS start-up message appears when you restart the  
server.  
ꢁ
Does the server have appropriate memory boards or PCI card?  
Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed.  
Fail to access to internal or external devices:  
ꢁ
Are cables properly connected?  
→
Make sure that the interface cables and power cord are properly connected. Also  
make sure that the cables are connected in the correct order.  
ꢁ
ꢁ
Is that device compliant with NEC Express5800/ft series?  
Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed.  
Is the power-on order correct?  
→
→
When the server has any external devices connected, power on the external  
devices first, then the server.  
ꢁ
Did you install drivers for connected optional devices?  
→
Some optional devices require specific device drivers. Refer to the manual that  
comes with the device to install its driver.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-26  
→
Some optional devices connected to the serial port require settings for I/O port  
address and operation mode. Refer to the manual that comes with the device to  
configure the device.  
<Menu to check: [Advanced] → [Peripheral Configuration]>  
ꢁ
ꢁ
Is SCSI controller configuration correct?  
→
→
If the SCSI devices are connected to the built-in SCSI controller, check the  
setting from the BIOS setup utility.  
Is SCSI device configuration correct?  
If external SCSI devices are connected to the server, you need to make settings of  
SCSI ID and terminal resistance. For details, see manuals included with the SCSI  
device.  
ꢁ
ꢁ
Does the SCSI driver recognize the target devices?  
→
→
Execute the following command to check if the SCSI driver recognizes the target  
devices.  
>cat /proc/scsi/scsi  
Is a driver which supports the SCSI device loaded to kernel?  
Execute the following command to check if a driver which supports the SCSI  
device is loaded to kernel.  
>lsmod  
CPU not in Dual mode:  
→
→
Check if the memory configuration is correct.  
Check if third-party CPUs or memory (DIMM) are used.  
Disk not in Dual mode:  
Unless you perform mirroring (including reconfiguration after failed disks are  
→
replaced) in correct order, the mirror may not be [re]configured. Check if the steps  
were correct.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-27  
The keyboard or mouse fails to operate:  
ꢁ
Is the cable properly connected?  
→
Make sure that the cable is connected to the correct connector on the rear of the  
server.  
ꢁ
ꢁ
Are the keyboard and mouse are compliant with NEC Express5800/ft series?  
Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed.  
Is BIOS configuration correct?  
→
→
The keyboard and mouse may be disabled with the BIOS setup utility of the  
server. Check the settings with the BIOS setup utility.  
<Menu to check: [Advanced] → [Keyboard Features]>  
ꢁ
Does the server have drivers installed?  
→
Refer to the manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and  
mouse drivers are installed. (These drivers are installed along with the OS.) Some  
OS's allow you to change the keyboard and mouse settings. Refer to manual that  
comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and mouse settings are correct.  
ꢁ
ꢁ
Are you using a PS2-USB conversion connector?  
→
→
The PS2-USB conversion connector is not supported. Use the keyboard and  
mouse that are specified by NEC.  
Is the server switch unit connected at the time of system installation?  
If the server switch unit s has been connected when reinstalling the system, gpm  
service starts on startup but a mouse is not available. Select the USB 3-button  
mouse using mouseconfig command and then restart gpm using the following  
command. The mouse becomes available after restart.  
>service gpm restart  
Screen freezes, keyboard and mouse don’t work:  
If the amount of memory is large, it takes time to copy the memory in dual mode  
→
and the system stops working during the copying. It’s not system trouble.  
Fail to access (read or write) to the floppy disk:  
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Does the floppy disk drive contain a floppy disk?  
Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive until it clicks.  
Is the floppy disk write-protected?  
→
→
→
Place the write-protect switch on the floppy disk to the "Write-enabled" position.  
Is the floppy disk formatted?  
Use a formatted floppy disk or format the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive.  
Refer to the manual that comes with the OS for formatting a floppy disk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-28  
If you still cannot access to the floppy disk using the methods above, perform the  
following operation and check if the floppy disk becomes accessible:  
1. Login to the system as a user with a root authority.  
2. Create a directory using the following command.  
# mkdir /mnt/floppy  
There is no problem if the message, indicating that the directory has already  
been created, is displayed after executing the command.  
3. Execute the following command.  
# modprobe usb-storage  
4. Execute the following command to check that you can access to the floppy  
disk.  
# mount /dev/sdg /mnt/floppy  
This is an example when sdg recognizes the USB floppy device and the floppy disk is  
formatted in MS-DOS.  
If the floppy disk becomes accessible by the procedure above, add the following to  
/etc/rc.d/rc.modules in order to make usb-storage be loaded automatically. By adding  
the following line, the floppy disk drive can be mounted by performing step 4 above.  
modprobe usb-storage  
Fail to access to the CD-ROM:  
ꢁ
Is the CD-ROM properly set in the CD-ROM drive tray?  
→
The tray is provided with a holder to secure the CD-ROM. Make sure that the  
CD-ROM is placed properly in the holder.  
ꢁ
ꢁ
Is the CD-ROM applicable to the server?  
→
→
The CD-ROM for Macintosh is not available for use.  
Is the PCI module disconnected (offline)?  
You cannot use the CD-ROM drive on the disconnected PCI module. Also, if you  
try to mount the CD-ROM drive on the disconnected PCI module, the OS displays  
the following error and continues to try installing the CD-ROM drive based on the  
information of the status of the PCI module not duplicated. As a result, you will  
not be able to access to the CD-ROM drive even after the PCI module is  
duplicated. (System restart is required for recovery.)  
status timeout: status=0xff {Busy}  
drive not ready for command  
ATAPI reset timed-out, status=0xff  
reset timed-out, status=0xff  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-29  
ꢁ
Is the CD-ROM device mounted?  
→
Perform the following procedure and check if you can access to the CD-ROM  
again.  
1. Login to the system as a user with a root authority.  
2. Set a CD-ROM to the CD-ROM drive on the PCI module (Group 1), and then  
execute the following command:  
#mount /mnt/cdrom  
If you use the CD-ROM drive on the PCI module (Group 2), execute the  
following command:  
#mount /mnt/cdrom1  
ꢁ
Is proper device mounted?  
→
Mount /mnt/cdrom to use the PCI module (Group 1), or /mnt/cdrom1 to use the  
PCI module (Group 2).  
Fail to access the hard disk:  
ꢁ
Is the hard disk applicable to the server?  
→
→
Operation of any device that is not authorized by NEC is not guaranteed.  
Is the hard disk properly installed?  
ꢁ
Make sure to lock the hard disk with the lever on its handle. The hard disk is not  
connected to the internal connector when it is not completely installed (see  
Chapter 8). When the hard disk is properly installed, the drive power LED for the  
hard disk is lit while the server is powered.  
Fail to start the OS:  
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Is a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive?  
→
→
→
Take out the floppy disk and restart the server.  
Is the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive?  
Take out the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and restart the server.  
Is the OS damaged?  
Try to recover the system by executing fsck, referring to “System Repair” in the  
separate volume of User’s Guide (Setup).  
ꢁ
Is grub used?  
→
Check that /etc/grub.conf is configured properly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-30  
OS behavior is unstable:  
ꢁ
Have you changed kernel?  
→
→
Make sure that you have not applied patches for general kernel or you have not  
changed the kernel installed for the device.  
ꢁ
Are you accessing to the directories or files under /dev or /proc?  
NEC Express5800/ft series frequently saves and updates the information on the  
system operation and management at the following directories. Thus, if you access  
the directories or files under the following directories, for example, by using  
command, it may affect the fault-tolerant feature and cause the system to become  
unstable. Make sure not to access to the directories or files.  
/dev/mem  
/proc/kcore  
/proc/bus  
/proc/ft/bb/cpu[0,1]/dump  
Cannot install Linux properly:  
ꢁ
Did you follow the precautions for installation?  
→
→
Read the precautions for installation again.  
ꢁ
Did you install Linux with the proper procedure?  
Check the installation procedure again. Make sure to install Linux with the  
proper procedure.  
Cannot read the character on the console after the PCI failover caused by the PCI  
module failure:  
→
Infrequently, the character on the console screen may be distorted at the time of  
PCI module failover. It does not affect any operations of the device. Execute the  
following command:  
>/sbin/setsysfont  
The server repeats rebooting at system startup:  
Is the value of [Boot Monitoring Time-out Period] in the BIOS setting appropriate?  
ꢁ
→
Change the value of [Boot Monitoring Time-out Period] to suit your  
environment.  
For details, see Chapter 4 “SYSTEM BIOS ~ SETUP ~”.)  
Disk access LEDs on the disks are off:  
The LEDs may seem to be off when an excessive amount of access causes the  
→
frequent blinking. Check if the LEDs are blinking green when the access is  
reduced, or the LEDs are green when the access is stopped.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-31  
LAN cards which are not used (LAN cables are not connected) appears to be in error  
status:  
→
The system judges that ports are out of order when LAN cards in the ports are  
connected to the server but are not used (or their cables are not connected).  
Therefore, Ethernet board status on the NEC ESMPRO Manager’s Data Viewer  
([FTServer] – [PCI Module] – [Ethernet adapter]) is red (error) and the server  
status on the Operation Window of NEC ESMPRO Manager is also red (error). To  
prevent such misjudgment, connect unused LAN cards to each other by cross  
LAN cables.  
Event Log  
“I/O error” is recorded in the log at OS startup  
The following message may be displayed on the screen or recorded in the log if a USB floppy disk  
drive is connected at OS startup. However, this will not impact operations (in the description below,  
* represents an alphanumeric character).  
Partition Check:  
sdg:<6> I/O error: dev **:**, Command ********, sector 0  
I/O error : dev **:**, Command ********, sector 0  
unable to read partition table  
ESMCpuPerf-related logs are recorded in the system event log:  
→
If NEC ESMPRO Agent cannot get performance information from the OS due to  
a temporary resource shortage or high load ratio on the system, it will record the  
following event log. However, the operations are not affected (in the description,  
Y and X represent alphanumeric characters. YYYY may not be obtained).  
Source:  
Event ID:  
ESMCpuPerf  
9005  
Description: Cannot get system performance information now (YYYY  
Code=xxxx).  
If NEC ESMPRO Agent cannot get information, it will treat the load ratio as 0%.  
So, if NEC ESMPRO Agent cannot get information continuously, the CPU load  
ratio may appear lower than the actual value.  
EvntAgnt log is recorded in the application event log:  
This event does not have any influence on the system, not on SNMP services.  
→
Thus no measurement is required.  
Source:  
ID:  
EvntAgnt  
1003  
Description: TraceFileName parameter not located in registry; Default trace file  
used is .  
Source:  
ID:  
EvntAgnt  
1015  
Description: TraceLevel parameter not located in registry; Default trace level  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-32  
used is 32.  
“APIC error” is recorded in the syslog by the operations such as inserting/removing  
disks:  
→
A message “APIC error” may be recorded to the log or displayed on the screen  
when you perform operations such as inserting/removing disks with the server  
powered on, because the internal status managed by the OS and the actual status  
on the server side are different. The operations are not affected.  
“info synchronization error” is recorded while the CPU modules are being  
synchronized:  
→
A message “info synchronization error” may be recorded in the log when the  
CPU modules are performing duplication because the internal status managed by  
the OS and the actual status on the server side are different. The operations are not  
affected.  
“card reports no resources” log is recorded when using the built-in LAN board:  
→
A message “card reports no resources” may be output to the log when the system  
cannot allocate the resource for the LAN driver due to high load ratio on the  
network access. The operations are not affected. LAN driver performs retry  
automatically thus the system continues communication without disconnecting the  
network connection.  
Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER  
When the server is not booted from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM, check the following:  
ꢁ
Did you set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER during POST and restart the server?  
→
→
If you do not set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER during POST and restart the  
server, an error message will appear or the OS will boot.  
ꢁ
Is BIOS configuration correct?  
The boot device order may be specified with the BIOS setup utility of the server.  
Use the BIOS setup utility to change the boot device order to boot the system  
from the CD-ROM drive first.  
<Menu to check: [Boot]>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-33  
When an error occurs while the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is in progress, the following message  
appears. After this message appears, check the error and take the appropriate corrective action  
according to the error codes listed in the table below.  
Message  
Cause and Remedy  
This machine is not supported.  
This NEC EXPRESSBUILDER version is  
not designed for this server. Execute the  
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER on the compliant  
server.  
NvRAM access error  
Hard disk access error  
An access to the nonvolatile memory  
(NvRAM) is not acceptable.  
The hard disk is not connected or it is  
failed.  
Check whether the hard disk is correctly  
connected.  
An error message will also be displayed when an error was detected during system diagnosis. Take a  
note or print the error message displayed, and contact your sales agent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-34  
Problems with Master Control Menu  
Failed to read online documentation  
ꢁ
Is HTML browser installed properly?  
→
→
Online documentation is an HTML-format file. Install the HTML browser  
(Internet Explorer 5.x or later) in your operating system.  
ꢁ
Is Adobe Acrobat Reader installed properly?  
A part of online documentation is supplied in PDF file format. Install the Adobe  
Acrobat Reader (Version 4.05 or later) in your operating system. You can also  
install the Adobe Acrobat Reader using the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER. Launch  
the Master Control Menu and select [Setup] → [Adobe Acrobat Reader].  
Image of online documentation is not clear  
Is your display unit set to display 256 colors or more?  
Set the display unit to display 256 colors or more.  
ꢁ
→
The master control menu fails to appear:  
ꢁ
Is your system Windows NT 4.0 or later, or Windows 95 or later?  
→
The CD-ROM Autorun feature is supported by Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 95.  
The older versions do not automatically start from the CD-ROM.  
ꢁ
ꢁ
Is Shift pressed?  
→
→
Setting the CD-ROM with Shift pressed down cancels the Autorun feature.  
Is the system in the proper state?  
The menu may not appear depending on the system registry setting or the timing  
to set the CD-ROM. In such a case, start the Internet Explorer and run  
\MC\1ST.EXE in the CD-ROM.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-35  
Problems with NEC ESMPRO  
NEC ESMPRO Agent  
→
See Chapter 5.  
NEC ESMPRO Manager  
→
See Chapter 5. See also online document in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM  
for troubleshooting and other supplementary information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-36  
COLLECTION OF TROUBLE LOGS  
In the event of trouble, you can get information in the procedures described below:  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀYou can perform the procedures described below only when you are asked by your  
maintenance personnel to get trouble logs.  
ꢀWhen the system restarts after the trouble, it may show a message that there is a shortage of  
virtual memory. However, continue the system startup. If you reset and restart the system,  
you cannot get correct information.  
Collection of syslog  
The log file of Linux is created under the following directory in text format:  
/var/log/  
The log file of NEC Express5800/ft series is also created in this directory, as with general log file  
of Linux.  
Collection of System Information  
The system information of Linux is recorded in syslog, etc. To collect the system information on the  
NEC Express5800/ft series, login to the system as a user with a root authority and then execute the  
following command:  
# logcollector  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-37  
Collection of the Memory Dump  
If a failure occurs, the memory data should be dumped to acquire the required information. If you  
stored the dump data in a DAT, label it so as to indicate the software (e.g. NTBackup) you used for  
storing it. You may save the diagnosis data to a desired destination.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀConsult with your sales agent before dumping the memory. Executing memory dumping  
while the server is in the normal operation may affect the system operation.  
ꢀRestarting the system due to an error may display a message indicating insufficient virtual  
memory. Ignore this message and proceed. Restarting the system again may result in  
dumping improper data.  
Preparing for Memory Dump  
Memory dumping with the DUMP switch may disable the server to restart. In such a case, it is  
required to force the server to shut down. This forced shutdown, however, is not available if  
"Masked" is selected for "Power Switch Mask" on the Security menu of the BIOS setup utility,  
SETUP, because this setting disables POWER switch operation.  
Follow the procedure below to change the setting to enable the forced shutdown and restart of the  
server.  
165. Power on the server and start the BIOS setup utility, SETUP.  
166. Select "Unmasked" for "Power Switch Mask" in the Security menu.  
167. Save the configuration data and exit the SETUP.  
Saving Dump Files  
Press the DUMP switch to save the dump file  
when an error occurs. Insert a metal pin (a  
straightened large paper clip will make a  
substitute) into the switch hole to press the  
DUMP switch.  
Pressing the DUMP switch saves the dump  
file in the specified directory. (Memory  
dumping may not be available when the CPU  
stalls.)  
Dump switches  
IMPORTANT: Do not use a toothpick or  
plastic stick that is easy to break.  
When the DUMP switch is pressed, the system restarts and collects the memory dump.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-38  
Backup of IPM Information  
Collect the IPMI information. NEC ESMPRO Agent must be installed to collect the information.  
1. Login to the system as a user with a root authority.  
2. Move to the directory where the NEC ESMPRO Agent is installed.  
Unless you have specified the installation destination, it is installed in  
“/opt/nec/esmpro_sa”. In this description, it is assumed to be installed in  
“/opt/nec/esmpro_sa”.  
cd /opt/nec/esmpro_sa  
3. Move to the directory where tools are stored.  
cd bin  
4. Execute the following command:  
./xrasutil  
ESRAS Utility will start.  
5. Select <Backup the current IPMI Information…>.  
The IPMI Information Backup screen will appear.  
6. Enter an output destination and a comment, and then click [OK].  
The information will be output to the specified location.  
<Backup File Name>: Specify the path to the file on which you want to save the  
information. By default, the information is output to log/ipmi.dat  
which is under the directory where NEC ESMPRO Agent is  
installed.  
<Comment>: Describe the information which you want to output with. (Optional)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
System Upgrade  
This chapter describes procedures to add options and replace failed components.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀOptional devices described in this chapter may be installed or removed by the user. However,  
NEC does not assume any liability for damage to optional devices or the server or  
malfunctions of the server resulted from installation by the user. NEC recommends you ask  
your sales agent to install or remove any optional devices.  
ꢀBe sure to use only optional devices and cables designated by NEC. Repair of the server due  
to malfunctions, failures, or damage resulted from installing such devices or cables will be  
charged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-2  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  
Observe the following notes to install or remove optional devices safely and properly.  
WARNING  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. There are risks of  
death or serious personal injury. See PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY in  
Chapter 1 for details.  
• Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.  
• Do not look into the CD-ROM drive.  
• Do not remove the lithium battery.  
• Disconnect the power plug before working with the server.  
CAUTION  
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. There are risks of  
fire, personal injury, or property damage. See PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY  
in Chapter 1 for details.  
• Do not install or remove components by a single person.  
• Do not install the server leaving the cover removed.  
• Make sure to complete component installation.  
• Do not pinch your finger(s).  
• High temperature  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-3  
ANTI-STATIC MEASURES  
The server contains electronic components sensitive to static electricity. Avoid failures caused by  
static electricity when installing or removing any optional devices.  
ꢀ Wear wrist straps (arm belts or anti-static gloves).  
Wear wrist straps on your wrists. If no wrist strap is available, touch an unpainted metal  
part of the cabinet before touching a component to discharge static electricity from your  
body.  
Touch the metal part regularly when working with components to discharge static  
electricity.  
ꢀ Select a suitable workspace.  
–
–
Work with the server on the anti-static or concrete floor.  
When you work with the server on a carpet where static electricity is likely to be  
generated, make sure take anti-static measures beforehand.  
ꢀ Use a worktable.  
Place the server on an anti-static mat to work with it.  
ꢀ Clothes  
–
–
–
Do not wear a wool or synthetic cloth to work with the server.  
Wear anti-static shoes to work with the server.  
Take off any metal accessories you wear (ring, bracelet, or wristwatch) before  
working with the server.  
ꢀ Handling of components  
–
–
–
Keep any component in an anti-static bag until you actually install it to the server.  
Hold a component by its edge to avoid touching any terminals or parts.  
To store or carry any component, place it in an anti-static bag.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-4  
PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE  
Note the followings, when installing or replacing devices, to improve the performance of NEC  
Express5800/ft series.  
ꢀ With the NEC Express5800/ft series server, devices can be replaced during the continuous  
operation. Take extreme care for electric shock and damage to the component due to  
short-circuit.  
ꢀ Optional devices cannot be installed or removed during continuous operation. Normally,  
shutdown the OS, check that the server is powered off, disconnect all power cords and  
interface cables from the server before installing or removing the optional devices.  
ꢀ To remove the CPU or PCI module during the continuous operation, disable the intended  
module (place the module off-line) by using the ft server utility of the NEC ESMPRO  
Agent or the NEC ESMPRO Manager from the management PC on the network. After a  
new module is installed to the server, enable the module using the ft server utility or the  
NEC ESMPRO Manager.  
TIPS: The system is defaulted to automatically boot the module, once installed. This  
setting can be changed with the ft server utility or the NEC ESMPRO Manager. For more  
information, see Chapter 5.  
ꢀ Make sure to provide the same hardware configuration on both groups.  
ꢀ Use the same slots and sockets on both groups.  
ꢀ Do not install those devices having different specifications, performance, or features.  
ꢀ Before removing the setscrews from the CPU and PCI modules, place the desired module  
off-line using the ft server utility or the NEC ESMPRO Manager.  
ꢀ When replacing the CPU or PCI module, wait more than 5 minutes after removing it to  
mount a new module.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-5  
3.5-INCH HARD DISK DRIVE  
The 3.5-inch device bay in front of the server contains six slots in which hard disks with the SCA2  
interface are installed.  
The figures used in this section show the rack-mount model. The orientation is the only difference  
from the tower model.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀDo not use any hard disks that are not authorized by NEC. Installing a third-party hard disk  
may cause a failure of the server as well as the hard disk. Purchase hard disks of the same  
model in pair. Contact your sales agent for hard disk drives optimum for your server.  
ꢀThe OS starts from the hard disk that is mounted in Slot 1 of the primary module (whose  
POWER LED is on).  
ꢀIf you shut down the OS with the PCI module not duplicated, RAID of the hard disk drives  
may be disconnected. When starting the OS after this happened, start from the hard disk  
drive mounted on the PCI module which was online when the OS was shut down. (See  
Chapter 7 “Troubleshooting” for details).  
ꢀWhen expanding hard disk drives to the 3.5-inch device bays, make sure to perform the  
operation of “RAID CONFIGURATION WHEN DISKS ARE ADDED” described later.  
TIPS:  
ꢀPOWER LED is on to indicate that it is the primary module.  
ꢀThe module that you plug in first will be the primary module.  
You can install hard disks, each of which is about 25.4 mm (1 inch) in thickness, to the three slots of  
each module. Each device bay has a label describing the slot number.  
Disks of the same slot number are mirrored between the groups. The figure below shows the groups  
and mirroring slots.  
Slots 1  
Slots 2  
Slots 3  
Group 1  
Group 2  
Slots used in mirroring  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-6  
Empty slots in the hard disk bay contain dummy trays. The dummy trays are inserted to improve the  
cooling effect within the device. Always insert the dummy trays in the slots in which hard disks are  
not installed.  
Attach an HDD ID label indicating the slot number of installed hard disk to the handle of the hard  
disk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-7  
Installing 3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive  
Follow the procedure below to install the hard disk. A hard disk may be installed in another slot in  
the same procedure.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀ Make sure to read "Anti-static Measures" and "Preparing Your System for Upgrade" before  
starting installing or removing options.  
ꢀ Install two hard disks for dual disk configuration before starting the OS. Make sure to  
configure the hard disks as dual disk.  
168. <Tower model>  
Unlock the front bezel with the security key and open it.  
<Rack-mount model >  
Unlock the front bezel with the security key and remove the upper and lower panels.  
169. Perform the shutdown process from the OS properly.  
Execute the shutdown process using shutdown command, and then press the POWER  
switch to turn off the server.  
170. Disconnect all the power cords from the power outlet.  
171. Identify the slot to which you want to install the hard disk.  
Install a hard disk in an empty slot in the group, starting from the left slot.  
172. Press the lever of a dummy tray to unlock  
the handle. Then bring out the handle and  
remove the tray by pulling the handle.  
All the slots except Slot 1 have a dummy  
tray.  
IMPORTANT: Carefully keep the  
removed dummy tray.  
173. Unlock the hard disk to be added.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-8  
174. Firmly hold the handle of the hard disk to install and insert the hard disk into the slot.  
TIPS:  
ꢀ
Engage the upper and lower frames of the tray with  
the left and right grooves on the device bay and insert  
the hard disk.  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Insert the disk until the lever hook touches the server  
frame.  
Check the orientation of lever. Insert the hard disk  
with the lever unlocked.  
175. Slowly close the lever.  
When the lever is locked, you will hear a click sound.  
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to pinch your finger(s) between the lever and handle.  
TIPS: Check the hook of the lever is engaged with the frame.  
9. Connect all the power cords.  
10. Press the POWER switch to turn on the system power.  
11. <Tower model>  
Close the front bezel and lock it with the security key.  
<Rack-mount model>  
Install the upper and lower panels and lock the front bezel with the security key.  
12. Set the dual disk configuration (see the separate volume of User’s Guide).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-9  
Removing 3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive  
Follow the procedure below to remove the hard disk.  
IMPORTANT: Make sure to read "Anti-static Measures" and "Preparing Your System for  
Upgrade" before starting installing or removing options.  
13. Disconnect the hard disk from RAID, referring to step 1 in “Restoring Redundant  
Configuration Manually” (page 3-6).  
14. <Tower model>  
Unlock the front bezel with the security key and open it.  
<Rack-mount model>  
Unlock the front bezel with the security key and remove the upper and lower panels.  
15. Perform the shutdown process from the OS properly.  
Execute the shutdown process using shutdown command, and then press the POWER  
switch to turn off the server.  
16. Disconnect all the power cords from the power  
outlet.  
17. Push the lever of the hard disk to unlock the  
handle.  
18. Hold the handle and hard disk to pull them off.  
19. Install the dummy tray in an empty slot according  
to procedures described in "Installation".  
Make sure to install the dummy tray in the empty  
slot to improve the cooling effect within the device.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-10  
Replacing 3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive  
Follow the procedure below to remove the failed hard disk. If the hard disk fails, it should be  
replaced with new device with the server powered-on.  
IMPORTANT: Make sure to read "Anti-static Measures" and "Preparing Your System for  
Upgrade" before starting installing or removing options. You can replace disks during  
continuous operation.  
Replacing the Hard Disk Drive  
20. Locate the failed hard disk.  
When a hard disk fails, the DISK LED on the hard disk drive’s handle illuminates green,  
but the DISK LED of the other mirrored disk illuminates amber.  
The DISK Access LED of the disk which the DISK LED is amber also illuminates amber.  
TIPS: Even if a hard disk fails, the DISK LEDs may not illuminate as described  
above. See “How to Locate Failed Disks” in Chapter 3 to identify failed disks.  
21. Referring to steps 1 and 2 in “Restoring Redundant Configuration Manually” (page 3-6),  
disconnect the failed hard disk from RAID and then remove it.  
No need to shutdown the OS.  
22. Refer to the steps in "Installing the hard disk" to install a new hard disk.  
TIPS: The hard disk to be installed for replacement must have the same specifications  
as its mirroring hard disk.  
23. The system will automatically restore its redundant configuration.  
Since the redundant configuration is restored automatically, you do not need to use  
VERITAS Volume Manager to restore it.  
IMPORTANT:  
The redundant configuration is not restored automatically in the following cases:  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
If you use a signed hard disk.  
If you replace a disk that has partitions or volumes.  
If you replace a disk while the system is shut down.  
RAID CONFIGURATION WHEN DISKS ARE ADDED  
When disks are added, ftdiskadm is used for RAID configuration. The following is an example of  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-11  
adding disks to Slot3 of Group1 and Group2 by using ftdiskadm:  
(Example)  
After selecting “y”, RAID configuration starts, and unless there is any problem, the process  
completes. The status of RAID can be viewed by the above “Raid Status”.  
*1 Before entering the slot number, make sure the disk and the other disk of the pair are inserted to  
the SCSI slots.  
*2 When necessary, enter a disk label. When the disk is to be used as a single partition, the disk  
label will be used as entered here. If the disk is to be divided to multiple partitions, “entered  
value_s<partition number>” will be used. However, disk labels may be changed by using  
commands including e2label.  
*3 Enter a number of partitions to divide the disk. Then enter the size in MB for each partition. For  
the last partition, the remaining value will be assigned automatically. The partition number  
begins with 1 and the next number will be 5 and the rest will be in ascending order. A certain  
size of partition is reserved for the last partition. Thus the range of specifiable value is smaller  
than the actual disk capacity. In addition, the actual partition size changes little depending on the  
disk structure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-12  
Check the disk status to confirm that the disk is added successfully.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-13  
CPU MODULE  
Concerning the CPU module, you can add or replace the following components, or CRU  
(customer-replaceable units):  
ꢀ
ꢀ
CPU (processor)  
DIMM (memory)  
Remove the CPU module to install or remove these devices. The figures used in this section show  
the tower model. The orientation is the only difference from the rack-mount model.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀ Ask your sales agent to replace the CPU module and components of the CPU module.  
ꢀ Make sure to read "Anti-static Measures" and "Preparing Your System for Upgrade" before  
installing or removing options.  
ꢀ To install or remove CPU or DIMM, first power off the server before removing the CPU  
module. The procedures described below are for replacement of DIMMs.  
ꢀ Removing the module being operating may cause unexpected trouble. Use the management  
software (e.g., ft server utility or NEC ESMPRO Manager) to identify the module to be  
removed so that the module is removed when it is stopped, without fail  
Then remove the relevant module after verifying the status LED on the CPU module.  
ꢀ Handle the module fixing screw with your hand, not by using any tool.  
ꢀ If you have replaced the module, attach an HDD ID label indicating the replaced module  
number to the upper part of the fixing screw of the module.  
PRECAUTIONS:  
When replacing a PCI module and a CPU module, replace one module and wait until dual  
configuration is established to replace the other module. If you replace the both modules  
simultaneously, dual configuration of either CPU modules or PCI modules may fail. (See  
Chapter 7 “Troubleshooting”.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-14  
Removing CPU Module  
Follow the procedure below to remove the CPU module.  
24. Stop the CPU module you want to remove.  
To this end, use the ft server utility of the NEC ESMPRO Agent installed to your server or  
the Data Viewer of the NEC ESMPRO Manager.  
For the detailed procedure, see "NEC ESMPRO Agent and Manager" - "Maintenance of  
NEC Express5800/ft series" in Chapter 5.  
NEC ESMPRO Manager  
ft server utility  
Select [ft server] → [CPU Module] → [CPU  
Module (to be removed)] → [CPU Module  
Start/Stop] → [Stop].  
Select [FTServer] → [CPU Module] → [CPU  
Module (to be removed)] → [Maintenance] →  
[Bring Up/Bring Down] → [Bring Down].  
After the CPU module enters into off-line status, the status LED will change as follows.  
Fail LED: Red  
State LED: Off  
25. <Tower model>  
Unlock the front bezel with the security key and open it.  
<Rack-mount model>  
Unlock the front bezel with the security key and remove the upper and lower panels.  
26. Loosen the setscrews that secured the CPU module’s release lever.  
27. Hold the release lever of the CPU module and pull it off.  
The CPU module is slightly pulled out toward you.  
IMPORTANT: Do not hold the other parts than the release lever to pull the module.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-15  
28. Pull off the module halfway slowly. Pushing down the latch lever on the side to unlock it,  
pull the module off the rack.  
IMPORTANT: Carefully handle the CPU module so that you will not drop it or strike  
it against other server internal devices.  
Release lever  
Release lever  
Latch lever  
29. Carefully place the CPU module on the flat and sturdy table.  
Avoid the dusty or humid place.  
30. Remove the two setscrews on the front of the CPU module and one setscrew on the back.  
31. Slide the top cover a little to remove it.  
This allows you to access the devices in the CPU module. For more information on how to  
handle these devices, see the associated sections.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-16  
Installing CPU Module  
Follow the procedure below to install the CPU module:  
IMPORTANT: Make sure to read "Anti-static Measures" and "Preparing Your System for  
Upgrade" before starting installing or removing options.  
32. Install the top cover to the CPU module.  
TIPS: Check the left, right, and upper tabs on the cover are certainly engaged with  
the CPU module.  
33. Secure the top cover to the CPU module with the three setscrews.  
34. Firmly hold the CPU module with both hands and insert it into the server.  
Hold the module in such a way that its back panel connector faces the back of the rack and  
engage the guides of the module and chassis to insert it slowly.  
Release lever  
Wrong  
(The hook is located  
before the frame)  
Correct  
(The hook is located  
behind the frame)  
35. Hold the release lever to push the module as far as it goes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-17  
36. Close the release lever.  
IMPORTANT: Unless the release levers are located inside the rack frame, the  
module won’t be mounted correctly.  
37. Screw the release levers.  
38. Boot the installed CPU module.  
The system is defaulted to automatically boot the CPU module, once installed.  
If the automatic feature is disabled, boot the CPU module using the ft server utility of the  
NEC ESMPRO Agent installed to the server or the Data Viewer of the NEC ESMPRO  
Manager.  
For the detailed procedure, see "NEC ESMPRO Agent and Manager" - "Maintenance of  
NEC Express5800/ft series" in Chapter 5.  
NEC ESMPRO Manager  
Select [FTServer] → [CPU Module] → [(installed)  
CPU Module] → [Maintenance] → [Bring Up/Bring  
Down] → [Bring Up].  
ft server utility  
Select [ft server] → [CPU Module] → [(installed)  
CPU Module] → [CPU Module Start/Stop] →  
[Start].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-18  
DIMM  
The DIMM (dual inline memory module) is installed to the DIMM socket in the CPU module on the  
NEC Express5800/ft series.  
The CPU module board is equipped with six sockets. Two standard DIMMs are mounted in  
DIMM#1 and #2 each. (The standard DIMM can be replaced with another DIMM.)  
ꢀ N8800-048E/049E: Two 256MB DIMMs  
DIMMs should be installed to these sockets, starting from the lowest socket number.  
TIPS:  
ꢀ The memory capacity can be increased up to 3 GB (six 512 MB DIMMs).  
ꢀ In the error messages and logs in POST, NEC ESMPRO, or Off-line Maintenance Utility, the  
DIMM connector may be described as “group”. The number next to “group” corresponds to  
the connector numbers shown in the figure below.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀ The DIMM is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to touch the metal frame of  
the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the DIMM. Do not  
touch the DIMM terminals or on-board parts with a bare hand or place the DIMM directly on  
the desk. For static notes, see the section "Anti-static Measures" described earlier.  
ꢀ Make sure to use the DIMM authorized by NEC. Installing a third-party DIMM may cause a  
failure of the DIMM as well as the server. Repair of the server due to failures or damage  
resulted from installing such a board will be charged.  
ꢀ Before adding or removing DIMMs, power off the server and detach the CPU module.  
ꢀ Make sure to read "Anti-static Measures" and "Preparing Your System for Upgrade" before  
installing or removing options.  
CPU module board  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-19  
Note the followings to install or replace DIMM.  
ꢀ The DIMMs with the same number are linked among the groups. When a DIMM is added  
to one group, another identical DIMM should be installed to the socket with the same  
number in another group. This rule is applied to the case of removal.  
ꢀ The linked DIMMs should be of the same product with same performance.  
ꢀ DIMMs should be installed in sockets, starting from the lowest socket number.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-20  
Installing DIMM  
Follow the procedure below to install the DIMM. Make sure to power off the server before starting  
installation except when replacing DIMM.  
39. Shutdown OS.  
Press the POWER switch to turn off the server.  
40. Disconnect power cord from outlet.  
41. Remove the CPU module.  
42. Check to be sure in which socket you are mounting the DIMM.  
43. Remove the connector cover from the socket.  
A DIMM connector cover is installed to the open  
socket. When the levers on both ends of the  
connector are opened, the DIMM connector cover is  
unlocked and you can remove the cover.  
IMPORTANT: Carefully keep the removed  
DIMM connector cover.  
44. Insert a DIMM into the DIMM socket straight.  
TIPS: Pay attention to the orientation of the  
DIMM. The terminal of the DIMM has a cutout to  
prevent misinsertion.  
After the DIMM is completely inserted into the  
socket, the levers are automatically closed.  
45. Mount the CPU module.  
46. Connect the power cords.  
47. Press POWER switch to power on the module.  
48. Verify that POST displays no error messages.  
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the massage and see the POST error  
messages listed in Chapter 7.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-21  
Removing DIMM  
Follow the procedure below to remove the DIMM. Make sure to power off the server before  
installation except when replacing DIMM.  
TIPS: Unless at least two DIMMs are installed, the server does not work.  
49. Shutdown OS.  
Press the POWER switch to turn off the server.  
50. Disconnect power cord from outlet.  
51. Remove the CPU module.  
52. Open the levers on the target DIMM socket. The DIMM is unlocked and you can remove  
the device.  
53. Mount the CPU module.  
54. Connect the power cable.  
55. Press the POWER switch to power on the module.  
56. Verify that POST displays no error messages.  
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the massage and see the POST error  
messages listed in Chapter 7.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-22  
Replacing DIMM  
Follow the procedure below to replace the failed DIMM.  
57. Identify the failed DIMM using the Data Viewer of the NEC ESMPRO Manager.  
58. Remove the CPU module.  
59. Replace a DIMM  
60. Install the CPU module.  
61. Boot the CPU module using the NEC ESMPRO Manager or ft server utility.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-23  
PROCESSOR (CPU)  
In addition to the standard CPU (Intel® Xeon™ Processor), you can add one CPU to make a  
multi-processor system.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀ The CPU is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to touch the metal frame of the  
server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the CPU. Do not touch  
the CPU terminals or on-board parts with a bare hand or place the CPU directly on the desk.  
For static notes, see the section "Anti-static Measures" described earlier.  
ꢀ Do not use the system before checking to see it works correctly.  
ꢀ Make sure to use the CPU authorized by NEC. Installing a third-party CPU may cause a  
failure of the CPU as well as the server. Repair of the server due to failures or damage  
resulted from installing such a board will be charged.  
ꢀ Before adding or removing CPU, power off the server and detach the CPU module.  
ꢀ Make sure to read "Anti-static Measures" and "Preparing Your System for Upgrade" before  
starting installing or removing options.  
CPU#2  
(additional)  
CPU#1  
(standard)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-24  
Installation  
Follow the steps below to mount a CPU:  
62. Shut down OS.  
Press the POWER switch to turn off the server.  
63. Unplug the power cord.  
64. Remove the CPU module.  
65. Detach the CPU air duct.  
66. Check to be sure of the location of the CPU socket.  
67. Remove the anti-dust sheet from the socket.  
IMPORTANT: Carefully keep the removed sheet.  
68. Lift the socket lever.  
IMPORTANT: Open the lever fully. It can be opened 120° or more.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-25  
69. Place the CPU carefully on the socket.  
TIPS: Pay attention to the orientation of the CPU.  
Pin marks  
The CPU and socket have pin marks to prevent  
misinsertion.  
70. After pressing the CPU softly against the socket, close  
the levers to fasten it.  
71. Remove the film of the cool sheet that is affixed on  
the heat sink.  
72. Place the heat sink on top of the CPU.  
73. Fasten the heat sink with its clip.  
Engage the clip holes with tabs on the sides of the retention: engage one hole first and  
engage the other holding the first hole.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-26  
74. Check to see if the heat sink is mounted parallel with the motherboard.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀ If the heat sink is not parallel to the motherboard, dismount and remount it. You  
cannot mount the heat sink correctly due to the following:  
- CPU is not mounted correctly  
- The heat sink clip is not engaged correctly.  
ꢀ Do not hold the fastened heat sink to move the CPU.  
75. Attach the CPU air duct.  
TIPS: Check to see if the air duct is attached securely with its projected parts inserted  
into the chassis.  
76. Install the CPU module.  
77. Connect the power cord.  
78. Press the POWER switch to power on the module.  
79. Verify that POST displays no error messages.  
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the massage and see the POST error  
messages listed in Chapter 7.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-27  
Removing CPU  
Follow the steps below to remove the CPU. Except when you replace the CPU with a new one,  
power off the server.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀDo not remove the CPU unless it is faulty.  
ꢀIf a CPU is not mounted on CPU#2, cover it with an anti-dust sheet.  
ꢀAfter operation, the cool sheet at the bottom of the heat sink may stick to the CPU because of  
heat. When you dismount the heat sink, turn it lightly to make sure that the heat sink is not  
sticking to the CPU. Otherwise, the CPU or socket may be damaged.  
80. Shut down the OS.  
Press the POWER switch to turn off the server.  
81. Unplug the power cord.  
82. Remove the CPU module.  
83. Detach the CPU air duct.  
84. Dismount the heat sink using the dismount tool included with the additional CPU.  
85. Remove the CPU.  
86. Affix an anti-dust sheet on the CPU socket.  
Place the adhesive part on the opposite side of the lever. Any part of the sheet place off the  
socket.  
87. Install the CPU module.  
88. Connect the power cable.  
89. Press the POWER switch to power on the module.  
90. Verify that POST displays no error messages.  
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the massage and see the POST error  
messages listed in Chapter 7.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-28  
Replacing CPU  
Follow the steps below to replace a failed CPU:  
91. Use Data Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager to check the failed CPU.  
92. Remove the CPU module.  
93. Replace the CPU.  
94. Install the CPU module.  
95. Start the CPU module from ft server utility or NEC ESMPRO Manager.  
In the initial setting, the server will start up automatically upon mounting the PCI module.  
If it is set not to start up automatically, use Data Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager or ft  
server utility to start it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-29  
PCI MODULE  
Three PCI boards can be installed to the PCI module.  
Up to two PCI boards can be added to each PCI module, therefore, the server can accommodate four  
additional PCI boards at a maximum (one video board has already been installed to each PCI  
module in standard configuration).  
Remove the PCI module when adding or replacing the PCI board. The figures used in this section  
show the rack-mount model. The orientation is the only difference from the tower model.  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀ Ask your sales agent to replace the PCI module and its components.  
ꢀ Make sure to read "Anti-static Measures" and "Preparing Your System for Upgrade" before  
starting installing or removing options.  
ꢀ Handle the module fixing screw with your hand, not by using any tool.  
ꢀ If you have replaced the module, attach an HDD ID label indicating the module number to the  
upper part of the screw fixing the module.  
TIPS: The primary PCI module is the one whose POWER LED is on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-30  
Precautions  
ꢀ If you remove a PCI module during operation, dual configuration of its internal hard disks  
will be cancelled. If you mount the module again, the dual configuration will be restored  
automatically. However, do not perform a system shutdown or remove any of the PCI  
modules before the dual configuration is completed. Otherwise, hard disk data could be  
corrupted.  
ꢀ Removing the primary (active) module will cause unexpected trouble. Be sure to remove  
the secondary (inactive) module.  
ꢀ When the secondary BMC is not in synchronous condition, removing the PCI module on  
the primary BMC will lose the SG data (system data). If one of the STATUS LEDs is  
blinking in red, do not remove the PCI module associated with another STATUS LED.  
When DC power is off:  
BMC#1  
BMC#2  
Status  
Off (Primary) Blinking in red  
(Secondary)  
Do not remove the PCI module on Primary  
BMC side.  
(At 1-second intervals)  
BMC Sync disabled.  
Off (Primary) Illuminates red  
(Secondary)  
Do not remove either PCI modules.  
During BMC DUMP.  
Off (Primary) Blinking in red  
(Secondary)  
Do not remove either of the PCI modules or  
control the AC/DC power before the LED  
stops blinking.  
(At 0.5-second intervals)  
When DC power is on:  
BMC#1  
BMC#2  
Status  
Blinking in  
green  
Blinking in red  
(Secondary)  
Do not remove the PCI module on Primary  
BMC side.  
(Primary)  
(At 1-second  
intervals)  
(At 1-second intervals)  
BMC Sync disabled.  
Blinking in  
green  
Illuminates red  
(Secondary)  
Do not remove either PCI modules.  
During BMC Sync.  
(Primary)  
(At 1-second  
intervals)  
Blinking in  
green  
(Primary)  
(At 1-second  
intervals)  
Blinking in red  
(Secondary)  
(At 0.5-second intervals)  
Do not remove either of the PCI modules or  
control the AC/DC power before the LED  
stops blinking.  
ꢀ When you remove a PCI module, the system will be powered off automatically. If there is  
a CD-ROM in the drive, eject it before removing the module.  
ꢀ When you insert a PCI module while the system is off, make sure that the newly inserted  
PCI module’s BMC status lamp is off and then press the power switch.  
ꢀ When replacing a PCI module and a CPU module, replace one module and wait until dual  
configuration is established to replace the other module. If you replace the both modules  
simultaneously, dual configuration of either CPU modules or PCI modules may fail. (See  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-31  
Chapter 7 “Troubleshooting”.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-32  
Removing PCI Module  
Follow the procedure below to remove the PCI module.  
96. Stop the PCI module you want to remove.  
To this end, use the ft server utility of the NEC ESMPRO Agent installed to your server or  
the Data Viewer of the NEC ESMPRO Manager.  
For more information, see "NEC ESMPRO Agent and Manager" - "Maintenance of NEC  
Express5800/ft series" in Chapter 5.  
NEC ESMPRO Manager  
Select [FTServer] → [PCI Module] → [PCI Module  
(to be removed)] → [Maintenance] → [Bring  
Up/Bring Down] → [Bring Down].  
ft server utility  
Select [ft server] → [PCI Module] → [PCI Module  
(to be removed)] → [PCI Module Start/Stop] →  
[Stop].  
After the CPU enters into off-line status, the status LEDs of the PCI board and PCI  
module will change as follows.  
PCI board slot status LEDs (all of them): Off  
PCI module  
Fail LED: Red  
State LED: Off  
97. <Tower model>  
Unlock the front bezel with the security key and open it.  
<Rack-mount model>  
Unlock the front bezel with the security key and remove the upper and lower panels.  
98. Disconnect the PCI module’s network cable and cables connected to the options.  
99. Loosen the setscrew securing the PCI module’s release lever.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-33  
100. Hold the release lever of the PCI module and pull it off.  
The PCI module is slightly pulled out toward you.  
IMPORTANT: Do not hold the other parts than the release lever to pull the module.  
101. Pull off the module halfway slowly. Pushing down the latch lever on the side to unlock it,  
pull the module off the rack.  
IMPORTANT: Carefully handle the PCI module so that you will not drop it or strike  
it against other server internal devices.  
Release lever  
Latch lever  
102. Carefully place the PCI module on the flat and sturdy table.  
Avoid the dusty or humid place.  
103. Remove the two setscrews on the front of the PCI module and one setscrew on the back.  
104. Slide the top cover a little to remove it.  
This allows you to access the devices in the PCI module. For more information on how to  
handle these devices, see the associated sections.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-34  
Installing PCI Module  
Follow the procedure below to install the PCI module:  
IMPORTANT: Make sure to read "Anti-static Measures" and "Preparing Your System for  
Upgrade" before starting installing or removing options.  
105. Install the top cover to the PCI module.  
TIPS: Check the left, right, and upper tabs on the cover are certainly engaged with  
the PCI module.  
106. Secure the top cover to the PCI module with the three setscrews.  
107. Firmly hold the PCI module with both hands and insert it into the server.  
108. Hold the module in such a way that its back panel connector faces the back of the rack and  
engage the guides of the module and chassis to insert it slowly.  
109. Hold the release lever to push the module as far as it goes.  
Release lever  
110. Connect the network cable and option cables.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-35  
111. Close the release lever.  
IMPORTANT: Unless the release levers are located inside the rack frame, the  
module won’t be mounted correctly.  
112. Screw the release levers.  
Release lever  
Wrong  
(The hook is located  
before the frame)  
Correct  
(The hook is located  
behind the frame)  
113. Boot the installed PCI module.  
The system is defaulted to automatically boot the PCI module, once installed. If this  
feature is disabled, boot the PCI module using the ft server utility of the NEC ESMPRO  
Agent installed to the server or the Data Viewer of the NEC ESMPRO Manager.  
For more information, see "NEC ESMPRO Agent and Manager" - "Maintenance of NEC  
Express5800/ft series" in Chapter 5.  
NEC ESMPRO Manager  
Select [FTServer] → [PCI Module] → [(installed)  
PCI Module] → [Maintenance] → [Bring Up/Bring  
Down] → [Bring Up].  
ft server utility  
Select [ft server] → [PCI Module] → [(installed)  
PCI Module] → [PCI Module Start/Stop] → [Start].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-36  
PCI BOARD  
Up to three PCI boards can be installed to the PCI module (however, one video board is already  
installed in each module in standard configuration).  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀ The PCI board is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to touch the metal frame  
of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the PCI board. Do  
not touch the PCI board terminals or on-board parts by a bare hand or place the PCI board  
directly on the desk. For static notes, see the section "Anti-static Measures" described earlier.  
ꢀ Make sure to read "Anti-static Measures" and "Preparing Your System for Upgrade" before  
starting installing or removing options.  
ꢀ PCI#1 is a slot dedicated for video board, which is standard equipment. Do not replace this  
broad with any other board.  
TIPS: When a PCI board is installed or removed, or the slot is changed, use the BIOS setup  
utility "SETUP" to change the detailed settings such as interrupt line (IRQ), when necessary. See  
Appendix B for details.  
Video board  
PCI#2  
PCI#3  
Built-in riser cards of PCI module  
Note the followings to install or replace PCI board.  
ꢀ To make a dual PCI board configuration, install the same type of board (i.e., having the  
same specifications and performance) to the same slot in another group.  
When a PCI board is installed to one group, another identical PCI board should be installed to  
the same slot in another group. This rule is applied to the case of removal.  
ꢀ Install the PCI boards, starting from the one with the smallest number.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-37  
Installing PCI Board  
Follow the procedure below to install the board to be connected to the PCI board slot.  
TIPS: To install the PCI board, make sure the shape of the board connector matches with the  
shape of the PCI board slot connector.  
114. Remove the PCI module.  
115. Remove the PCI module’s top cover.  
116. Identify the slot to which you want to install a PCI board and remove the connector cap.  
IMPORTANT: Carefully keep the removed connector cap.  
117. To install a long card, loosen the setscrew, slide the bracket, and secure it with the  
setscrew.  
Screw  
Bracket  
118. Pull the PCI board retainer bracket from the inside.  
6. Unscrew the setscrew of the additional slot cover at the same position (level) as the target  
slot, and remove the slot cover.  
IMPORTANT: Carefully keep the removed additional slot cover.  
PCI board retainer  
bracket  
Additional slot cover  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-38  
7. Align the terminal segment of the board with the connection of the slot and insert the  
board slowly into the slot.  
Guide  
Slots for inserting  
bracket edges  
TIPS: Check to see if the edge of the bracket (taper) is inserted into a slot of the  
chassis. In the case of a long board, check also to see if its other edge is inserted into  
the bracket guide.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-39  
8. Align the PCI board with the guide rail groove and insert the board slowly.  
IMPORTANT: If the insertion is unsuccessful, remove the board once and retry  
installation. Note that if excessive force is applied to the board, it may be damaged.  
9. Attach the retainer bracket to fasten the PCI board.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-40  
10. In the case of a long board, slide the bracket to fasten the other edge of the board.  
Screw  
Bends for fastening  
boards  
11. Install the top cover to the PCI module.  
12. Install the PCI module.  
13. Connect the network cable and option cables.  
14. Close the release lever.  
15. Secure the release lever with the setscrew.  
16. Boot the PCI module using the NEC ESMPRO Manager or ft server utility to establish a  
dual configuration.  
In the initial setting, the server will start up automatically upon mounting the PCI module.  
If it is set not to start up automatically, use Data Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager or ft  
server utility to start it.  
For more information, refer to "NEC ESMPRO Agent and Manager" - "Maintenance of  
NEC Express5800/ft series" in Chapter 5.  
17. Check the PCI module status LED and PCI board status LED.  
For description of LED indications, see “LEDs” in Chapter 2 and “Setup of Optional PCI  
Board” later in this chapter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-41  
18. Use cable ties to fasten the extra length of cables.  
Cable ties (included with cabinet)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-42  
Removing PCI Board  
Follow the procedure below to remove the PCI board.  
19. Remove the PCI module.  
20. Remove the PCI module’s top cover.  
21. Remove the PCI board retainer bracket to dismount the PCI board.  
In the case of a long board, unscrew the guide at the other edge and slide it to the front of  
the board.  
22. Install the additional slot cover to the open slot.  
23. Install the connector cover to the relevant slot.  
24. Attach the PCI board retainer bracket.  
25. Install the PCI module’s top cover.  
26. Install the PCI module.  
Do not close the release lever at this time.  
27. Connect the network cable and option cables.  
28. Close the release lever.  
29. Secure the release lever with the setscrew.  
30. Boot the PCI module using the NEC ESMPRO Manager or ft server utility to establish a  
dual configuration.  
In the initial setting, the server will start up automatically upon mounting the PCI module.  
If it is set not to start up automatically, use Data Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager or ft  
server utility to start it.  
For more information, refer to "NEC ESMPRO Agent and Manager" - "Maintenance of  
NEC Express5800/ft series" in Chapter 5.  
31. Check the PCI module status LED and PCI board status LED.  
For description of LED indications, see “LEDs” in Chapter 2 and “Setup of Optional PCI  
Board” later in this chapter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-43  
Replacing PCI Board  
Follow the procedure below to replace the failed PCI board.  
32. Check the PCI board LED and identify the failed PCI board.  
When the PCI board is failed or incorrectly installed, the two LEDs associated with the  
PCI board slot are being turned off.  
33. Remove the PCI module.  
34. Remove the PCI module’s top cover.  
35. Remove the PCI board retainer bracket to dismount the PCI board.  
In the case of a long board, unscrew the guide at the other edge and slide it to the front of  
the board.  
36. Replace the board and fasten it.  
37. Install the PCI module’s top cover.  
38. Install the PCI module.  
Do not close the release lever at this time.  
39. Connect the network cable and option cables.  
40. Close the release lever.  
41. Secure the release lever with the setscrew.  
42. Boot the PCI module using the NEC ESMPRO Manager or ft server utility to establish a  
dual configuration.  
In the initial setting, the server will start up automatically upon mounting the PCI module.  
If it is set not to start up automatically, use Data Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager or ft  
server utility to start it.  
For more information, refer to "NEC ESMPRO Agent and Manager" - "Maintenance of  
NEC Express5800/ft series" in Chapter 5.  
43. Check the PCI module status LED and PCI board status LED.  
For description of LED indications, see “LEDs” in Chapter 2 and “Setup of Optional PCI  
Board” later in this chapter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-44  
Setup of Optional PCI Board  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀTo enable the fault-tolerant feature of the optional device, the identical devices must be  
installed to the same slots in groups 1 and 2, respectively.  
ꢀA video board is already installed to slot #1 as standard configuration. This board may not be  
removed or replaced with any other board.  
ꢀChange the BIOS settings. For some optional PCI boards you may need to start up the BIOS  
setup utility to change the [Boot Monitoring Time-out Period] configuration in [Advanced] –  
[Monitoring Configuration]. For more details, see page 4-15.  
ꢀFor supported connection devices, contact your sales agent.  
N8804-001P1 100BASE-TX Adapter Set  
IMPORTANT: Note the following about this product:  
For LAN cable’s connector, use the RJ-45 connector which is compliant with IEC8877 standard.  
Using a different connector may make it difficult to remove the connector.  
ꢀ Slots to install the board  
PCI slot  
N code  
Name  
Remarks  
Group 1  
Group 2  
#1 #2 #3 #1 #2 #3  
N8804-001P1 100BASE-TX Adapter  
Set  
–
–
√
√
√
√
√: Can be installed. –: Cannot be installed.  
ꢀ Installation of driver  
The NEC Express5800/ft series duplicates one or two pairs of 100BASE-TX adapter sets  
(N8804-001P1) before using.  
After installing Operating System, install the drivers in the following procedure and make  
dual settings of the PCI board.  
TIPS: To perform this procedure, you have to log on the system as an Administrator or  
a member of the Administrators group.  
After installing the OS, follow the steps below to install a driver and establish a dual  
configuration:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-45  
44. Mount the N8804-001P1 100BASE-TX adapter to the slot with the same number in PCI  
module #1 and #2, and then start the OS.  
45. Build a dual LAN configuration.  
For the setting procedure, see “Configure expanded LAN board” described later, or “Set  
Dual LAN Card Configuration” in the separate volume of User’s Guide (Setup).  
ꢀ PCI Board Status LED Indications  
LED  
indications  
Description  
Action  
Green  
Duplex is specified,  
however, the server  
works in simplex  
mode.  
Configure duplex.  
Reapply the driver.  
Off  
The PCI board is  
properly installed and  
operating in  
non-duplex mode.  
(Does not depend on  
simplex or duplex  
mode.)  
In non-duplex mode, no specific problem occurs.  
The system is operating normally in duplex mode.  
The PCI board is  
properly installed and  
duplex is configured.  
The PCI board is not  
installed yet, the PCI  
board is installed  
incorrectly, or the  
power is not supplied.  
Mount the PCI board correctly.  
If the PCI board was not mounted, there is no  
problem.  
Check the condition of power unit.  
Remount the PCI module.  
Red  
In the process of  
configuring or  
canceling the duplex  
mode.  
Wait for a while until the indication changes. If the  
indication does not change, check the status of the  
installed PCI board slot using NEC ESMPRO  
Manager.  
Although the PCI  
Make the installed PCI board slot online from NEC  
board is mounted, it is ESMPRO Manager.  
offline or not  
functioning.  
Mount the PCI board correctly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-46  
N8104-84 1000BASE-SX Adapter  
Consult your sales personnel for details when purchasing this hardware.  
IMPORTANT: Note the following about this product:  
ꢀIt is advisable to add this product to such environment that each system is used for a different  
purpose (ex. system line, maintenance, monitoring) and multiple accesses do not occur  
simultaneously.  
ꢀIf there are multiple accesses, the processing power and transmission speed may be somewhat  
affected.  
ꢀThis product may require the revision of software and hardware in some cases. Ask your sales  
agent.  
ꢀ Slots to install the board  
PCI slot  
N code  
Name  
Remarks  
Group 1  
Group 2  
#1 #2 #3  
#1 #2 #3  
N8104-84 1000BASE-SX Adapter  
–
–
Each PCI module  
can contain one  
board only.  
√
√
√
√
√: Can be installed. –: Cannot be installed.  
ꢀ About network setting  
Make settings of the network after installing the N8104-84 1000BASE-SX connection  
board and starting the system. For the setting procedure, see “Configure expanded LAN  
board” described later, or “Set Dual LAN Card Configuration” in the separate volume of  
User’s Guide (Setup).  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀ Insert the N8104-84 1000BASE-SX connection board after the installation of the OS  
is completed. Use the N8104-84 1000BASE-SX connection board in pairs. Insert one  
into a slot in a PCI module and the other into the slot at the same location in the other  
PCI module.  
ꢀ The 1000BASE-SX (N8104-84) and the 1000BASE-T (N8104-103) cannot coexist.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-47  
ꢀ PCI Board Status LED Indications  
LED  
indications  
Description  
Action  
Green  
Duplex is specified,  
however, the server  
works in simplex  
mode.  
Configure duplex.  
Reapply the driver.  
Off  
The PCI board is  
properly installed and  
operating in  
non-duplex mode.  
(Does not depend on  
simplex or duplex  
mode.)  
In non-duplex mode, no specific problem occurs.  
The system is operating normally in duplex mode.  
The PCI board is  
properly installed and  
duplex is configured.  
The PCI board is not  
installed yet, the PCI  
board is installed  
incorrectly, or the  
power is not supplied.  
Mount the PCI board correctly.  
If the PCI board was not mounted, there is no  
problem.  
Check the condition of power unit.  
Remount the PCI module.  
Red  
In the process of  
configuring or  
canceling the duplex  
mode.  
Wait for a while until the indication changes. If the  
indication does not change, check the status of the  
installed PCI board slot using NEC ESMPRO  
Manager.  
Although the PCI  
Make the installed PCI board slot online from NEC  
board is mounted, it is ESMPRO Manager.  
offline or not  
functioning.  
Mount the PCI board correctly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-48  
N8104-103 1000BASE-T Adapter  
Consult your sales personnel for details when purchasing this hardware.  
IMPORTANT: Note the following about this product:  
ꢀ It is advisable to add this product to such environment that each system is used for a different  
purpose (ex. system line, maintenance, monitoring) and multiple accesses do not occur  
simultaneously.  
ꢀ If there are multiple accesses, the processing power and transmission speed may be somewhat  
affected.  
ꢀ For LAN cable’s connector, use the RJ-45 connector which is compliant with IEC8877  
standard. Using a different connector may make it difficult to remove the connector.  
ꢀ This product may require the revision of software and hardware in some cases. Ask your sales  
agent.  
ꢀ Slots to install the board  
PCI slot  
N code  
Name  
Remarks  
Group 1  
Group 2  
#1 #2 #3  
#1 #2 #3  
N8104-103 1000BASE-T Adapter  
–
–
Each PCI module  
can contain one  
board only.  
√
√
√
√
√: Can be installed. –: Cannot be installed.  
ꢀ About network setting  
Make settings of the network after installing the N8104-103 1000BASE-T connection  
board and starting the system. For the setting procedure, see “Configure expanded LAN  
board” described later, or “Set Dual LAN Card Configuration” in the separate volume of  
User’s Guide (Setup).  
IMPORTANT:  
ꢀ Insert the N8104-103 1000BASE-T connection board after the installation of OS is  
completed. Use the N8104-103 1000BASE-T connection board in pairs. Insert one  
into a slot in a PCI module and the other into the slot at the same location in the other  
PCI module.  
ꢀ The 1000BASE-T (N8104-103) and the 1000BASE-SX (N8104-84) cannot coexist.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-49  
ꢀ PCI Board Status LED Indications  
LED  
indications  
Description  
Action  
Green  
Duplex is specified,  
however, the server  
works in simplex  
mode.  
Configure duplex.  
Reapply the driver.  
Off  
The PCI board is  
properly installed and  
operating in  
non-duplex mode.  
(Does not depend on  
simplex or duplex  
mode.)  
In non-duplex mode, no specific problem occurs.  
The system is operating normally in duplex mode.  
The PCI board is  
properly installed and  
duplex is configured.  
The PCI board is not  
installed yet, the PCI  
board is installed  
incorrectly, or the  
power is not supplied.  
Mount the PCI board correctly.  
If the PCI board was not mounted, there is no  
problem.  
Check the condition of power unit.  
Remount the PCI module.  
Red  
In the process of  
configuring or  
canceling the duplex  
mode.  
Wait for a while until the indication changes. If the  
indication does not change, check the status of the  
installed PCI board slot using NEC ESMPRO  
Manager.  
Although the PCI  
Make the installed PCI board slot online from NEC  
board is mounted, it is ESMPRO Manager.  
offline or not  
functioning.  
Mount the PCI board correctly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-50  
Configure expanded LAN board  
Follow the procedure below to set the dual configuration of the 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T,  
1000BASE-SX.  
Make the following settings after mounting the LAN board according to the description of the  
“Installing PCI Board” in “PCI BOARD”.  
IMPORTANT: You need to login to the system as a user with a root authority to perform this  
operation.  
1. Execute the following command to check if the expanded LAN board is displayed properly at  
the number of the slot to which the LAN board was added.  
>vndctl status  
In the following description, “*” (a number between 1 and 7) indicates the number of the PCI  
slot to which the LAN board was added.  
2. Use the following command to add and register the LAN board expanded to the PCI slot *.  
>vndctl add *  
3. Execute the following command to set the dual LAN board configuration on the PCI slot *.  
>vndctl config *  
4. Use the following command to start the dual LAN board on the PCI slot *.  
>vndctl up *  
Setting dual configuration of the expanded LAN board is now completed. Note that the network  
setting above is effective to a virtual device ha* (“*” is a number), however, it is not reflected to  
physical devices (e.g., epro* or gb*, * is a number).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-51  
Delete LAN board setting  
Follow the procedure below to delete the LAN board setting.  
IMPORTANT: You need to login to the system as a user with a root authority to perform this  
operation.  
1.  
If the LAN board whose setting is to be deleted is operating, use the following command  
to stop it.  
In the following description, “*” (a number between 1 and 7) indicates the number of the PCI  
slot to which the LAN board to stop is connected.  
>vndctl down *  
TIPS: You can check the number * of the PCI slot to which the LAN board to stop is  
connected by using the following command:  
>vndctl status  
2.  
Execute the following command to delete the setting of the LAN board which is  
connected to the PCI slot whose number is *.  
Deleting the setting of the LAN board is now completed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-52  
Check the status of the LAN board  
Execute the following command to check the status of the LAN board:  
>vndctl status  
Example  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-53  
Check the setting information (e.g., IP addresses)  
Execute the following command to check the configuration information (e.g., IP addresses):  
>vndctl status slot_number  
Example  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-54  
Supplement  
Before using backup devices:  
If any of following backup devices is used for internal SCSI connector of NEC Express5800/ft  
series, you may need to update your firmware for backup devices.  
If your backup device to be connected is any of the following models, refer to the manual_E.pdf in  
your attached NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. That file describes detailed procedures to  
update your firmware.  
List of backup devices and firmware  
Model #  
N8151-29F  
N8151-34AF  
N8151-36F  
N8151-39F  
N8151-45F  
N8151-46F  
N8151-41AF  
NEC Model Name  
Built-In AIT Auto Loader  
Built-In AIT  
Built-In AIT Auto Loader  
Built-In DAT Auto Loader  
Built-In DAT  
Latest Firmware Revision  
L1nb  
07n6  
L7n7  
L2n4  
02n9  
01nm  
01nm  
Built-In AIT  
Built-In AIT  
All tape devices are needed to update the firmware if the firmware revision is older than  
above.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-55  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A  
Specifications  
NEC Express5800/320Lb  
N8800-048E  
NEC Express5800/320Lb-R  
N8800-049E  
Item  
CPU  
Type  
Intel® Xeon™ Processor × 1  
Clock/second cache  
Number of processors  
2.4GHz/512KB  
1
Chipset  
Memory  
Server Works Server Set III GC-LE  
512MB (256MB × 2*)  
Standard  
*Each module has two DIMMs in standard configuration.  
3GB (The standard DIMM must be replaced.)  
2 DIMMs (256MB × 2/ 512 MB × 2)  
Maximum  
Expansion unit  
Memory module  
Error check  
DDR200 SDRAM DIMM (Registered Type)  
ECC  
Graphics (VRAM)  
CT69000 (VRAM 2MB)  
Auxiliary  
input  
device  
Floppy disk (standard) 3.5-inch drive × 1 (USB)  
Hard disk (standard)  
None  
Hard disk (maximum)  
879.0GB* (146.5GB × 6)  
* The user area is reduced to a half of the physical capacity  
due to software mirroring.  
CD-ROM (standard)  
5.25 inch  
ATAPI interface × 2 (Load on tray type, x24 speed)  
None  
File bay  
3.5 inch  
6 slots  
Additional PCI  
slot  
6 slots  
(2 slots are used for graphics board.)  
LAN interface  
1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T (2 ports);  
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T (2 ports)  
External  
interface  
USB  
4-pin (2 ports) 2 ports are used by keyboard and external USB  
FDD.  
Serial  
D-sub 9-pin (2 ports)  
SCSI  
Network  
Display  
VHDCI 68-pin connector (2 ports)  
RJ-45 (4 ports)  
MINI D-sub 15-pin (1 port)  
Cabinet design  
Deskside and mini-tower  
Rack-mount type  
External dimensions  
222 (width)* × 560 (height) × 480 (width) × 177 (height) ×  
795 (depth) mm  
790 (depth) mm  
*370mm if stabilizers included  
68 kg (Max. 73kg)  
Weight  
56 kg (Max. 61kg)  
Power supply  
100 to 120 VAC ±10%, 200 to 240 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±1  
Hz  
Power consumption  
880 VA, 870 W  
Environmental  
requirements  
In operation  
Temperature 10 to 35°C  
Humidity 20 to 80% RH (non-condensing)  
In storage  
Temperature -10 to 55°C  
Humidity 20 to 80% RH (non-condensing)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-2  
(This page is intentionally left blank.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
I/O Port Address  
The factory-set I/O port addresses for the server are assigned as follows:  
Address  
00-1F 8-bit DMA control register  
Chip in Use  
20-21 Master 8259 programming interface  
2E-2F Configuration  
40-43 8254 programming interface  
60 Keyboard & mouse  
61 NMI status register  
64 Keyboard & mouse  
70-71 NMI enable register/real-time clock  
80-8F 16-bit DMA control register  
A0-A1 Slave 8259 programming interface  
C0-DF DMA controller page register  
E0-E9 Base address register  
F0 Register IRQ13  
F1-FF Logical device configuration  
170-177 or BAR2 EDMA2-compatible mode primary command block register  
1F0-1F7 or BAR0 EDMA2-compatible mode secondary command block register  
278-27F (Parallel port 3)  
2F8-2FF Serial port B  
BAR or 376 EDMA2-compatible mode secondary command block register  
370-377 (Floppy disk drive 2), IDE 2  
378-37F (Parallel port 2)  
3B0-3BB VGA  
3BC-3BE Parallel port 1  
3C0-3DF VGA  
3F6 or BAR1 EDMA2-compatible mode primary command block register  
3F0-3F7 (Floppy disk drive 1), IDE 1  
3F8-3FF Serial port A  
40B DMA1 expansion write mode register  
4D0 Master 8259 ELCR programming  
4D1 Slave 8259 ELCR programming  
4D6 DMA2 expansion write mode register  
580-58F SMBus control  
C00 PCI IRQ mapping index register  
C01 PCI IRQ mapping data register  
C14 PCI error status register  
C49 Address & status control  
C4A Rise time counter control  
C52 General register (GPMs)  
C6C ISA wait register  
C6F Other control registers  
CA2-CA3 IPMI (IMPI KCS interface)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-2  
Address  
CA4-CA5 IPMI (SMI interface)  
CA6-CA-7 IPMI (SCI/SW1 interface)  
Chip in Use  
CD6 Power management index register  
CD7 Power management data register  
CF8, CFC PCI configuration space  
CF9 Reset control  
F50-F58h General chipset  
BAR4+00-0F EDMA2 PCI base address register 4  
* Expressed in hexadecimal digits.  
* I/O port addresses of PCI devices are specified based on the type and number of PCI devices.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Mr Coffee Coffeemaker NLX20 User Manual
MSC Computer Hardware CX MB EVA2 User Manual
MTD Chipper 244 640A000 User Manual
Nady Systems Intercom System PMC3X User Manual
National Instruments Network Card NI 9853 User Manual
Nilfisk Advance America Vacuum Cleaner Nilfisk UZ 878 User Manual
NordicTrack Home Gym NTSA03990 User Manual
Olympus Camera Lens MCON 35 User Manual
Panasonic Fax Machine KX FLM651 User Manual
Parkside Sander XQ2 SE User Manual